VOLVO S40

Owner's manual Web Edition

Welcome to the world-wide family of owners. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. For further information please contact your retailer, or: In the USA: of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.us In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocanada.com 2009 © Volvo Car Corporation, All rights reserved. Contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Instruments and controls Important information...... 10 Occupant safety...... 18 Instrument overview...... 52 Environment...... 14 Seat belts...... 20 Instrument panel...... 54 Important warnings...... 15 Supplemental Restraint System...... 23 Indicator and warning symbols...... 56 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)...... 28 Symbols – instrument panel...... 58 Side impact protection airbags...... 31 Information display...... 61 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)...... 32 12-volt sockets...... 63 Whiplash Protection System...... 34 Lighting panel...... 64 Crash mode...... 36 Left-side steering wheel lever...... 67 Child safety...... 37 Trip computer...... 69 Child restraint systems...... 39 Cruise control*...... 71 Infant seats...... 41 Right-side steering wheel lever...... 73 Convertible seats...... 43 Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warn- Booster cushions...... 45 ing flashers...... 75 ISOFIX lower anchors...... 46 Power windows...... 76 00 01 Mirrors...... 02 78 Top tether anchors...... 48 Child restraint registration and recalls...... 49 Power moonroof*...... 81 Personal settings...... 83 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*..... 86

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

03 Climate 04 Interior 05 Locks and alarm General information...... 92 Front seats...... 104 Remote key and key blade...... 118 Air vents...... 94 Interior lighting...... 108 Valet locking ...... 122 Manual climate control...... 95 Storage compartments...... 110 Keyless drive*...... 123 Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*...... 98 Rear seat...... 113 Locking and unlocking...... 127 Air distribution...... 101 Trunk ...... 115 Child safety locks...... 129 03 04 Alarm*05...... 130

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

06 Starting and driving 07 Wheels and tires 08 Car care General information...... 136 General information...... 176 Washing and cleaning the car...... 204 Fuel requirements...... 140 Tire inflation...... 179 Paint touch up...... 208 Ignition switch...... 143 Inflation pressure—U.S. models ...... 181 Starting the vehicle...... 144 Inflation pressure—Canadian models .... 182 Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*... 146 Tire designations...... 183 Manual , 5-speed*...... 147 Glossary of tire terminology...... 185 , 6-speed*...... 148 Vehicle loading...... 186 Automatic transmission*...... 149 Uniform tire quality gradings...... 188 Shiftlock override...... 151 Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires.. 189 All Wheel Drive*...... 152 Temporary spare...... 190 Brake system...... 153 Wheel nuts...... 191 Parking brake...... 156 Changing a wheel...... 192 Stability system...... 157 Tire Sealing System ...... 194 Towing06...... 159 Tire Pressure07 Monitoring System (TPMS) 199 08 Jump starting...... 161 Towing a trailer...... 162 Detachable trailer hitch...... 164 Transporting loads...... 165 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*... 166 Park assist*...... 170

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

09 Maintenance and servicing 10 Audio 11 Specifications Volvo maintenance...... 212 Audio functions...... 240 Label information...... 266 Maintaining your car...... 213 Radio functions...... 245 Dimensions and weights...... 268 Hood...... 215 CD player/CD changer...... 253 Fuel, oils, and fluids...... 271 Engine compartment...... 216 Audio menu...... 257 Engine oil...... 273 Engine oil...... 217 Bluetooth® hands-free connection...... 258 Engine specifications...... 274 Fluids...... 219 Electrical system...... 276 Wiper blades...... 221 Three-way catalytic converter...... 278 Battery...... 222 Volvo programs...... 279 Replacing bulbs...... 224 Fuses09...... 231 10 11

7 Contents

12 Index Index...... 12 280

8 Contents

9 Introduction

Important information

About this manual Decals Risk of damage to the vehicle There are various types of decals in the vehicle • Before you operate your vehicle for the first whose purpose is to provide important infor- time, please familiarize yourself with the mation in a clear and concise way. The impor- information found in the chapters "Instru- tance of these decals is explained as follows, ments and controls" and "Starting and in descending order of importance. driving." • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury manual is extremely useful and should preferably be read after operating the vehi- cle for the first time. • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready

access. G031592 Footnotes Certain pages of this manual contain informa- White ISO symbols and white text/image on a tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of black or blue warning background and space the page. This information supplements the for a message. If the information on decals of text that the footnote number refers to (a letter this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). could result. G031590 Display texts There are several displays in the driver’s field Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- of vision that show messages generated by ground, white text/image on a black back- various systems and functions in the vehicle. ground. Decals of this type are used to indicate These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Man- potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this ual by being in slightly larger type than the sur- type could result in serious injury or death. rounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Doors auto lock).

10 Introduction

Important information

Information Types of lists used in the manual Bullet lists Procedures Bullets are used to differentiate a number of Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or components/functions/points of information actions that must be carried out in a certain that can be listed in random order. order, are arranged in numbered lists in this For example: manual. • Coolant If there is a series of illustrations associated • Engine oil with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same Continued way as the corresponding illustration.  This symbol can be found at the lower right Lists in which letters are used can be found corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page with series of illustrations in cases where to indicate that the current topic is continued the order in which the instructions are car- on the following page. G031593 ried out is not important. Options and accessories Arrows with or without numbers are used White ISO symbols and white text/image on a Optional or accessory equipment described in to indicate the direction of a movement. black background. These decals provide gen- this manual is indicated by an asterisk. eral information. If there are no illustrations associated with a Optional or accessory equipment may not be step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure available in all countries or markets. Please NOTE are indicated by ordinary numbers. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- Position lists ferently, depending on special legal require- The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to Red circles containing a number are used ments. in general overview illustrations in which be reproductions of the decals actually used Optional or accessory equipment may not be certain components are pointed out. The in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indi- available in all countries or markets. Please cation of how they look and their approxi- corresponding number is also used in the note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- mate location in the vehicle. The applicable position list's description of the various ferently, depending on special legal require- information for your particular vehicle can components. be found on the respective decals in the ments. vehicle. Contact your Volvo retailer for additional infor- mation.

11 Introduction

Important information

NOTE WARNING Shiftlock (automatic transmission) When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector • All information, illustrations and specifi- CALIFORNIA proposition 65 is locked in the (P)ark position. To release the cations contained in this manual are Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, selector from this position, turn the ignition key based on the latest product information and certain vehicle components contain or to position II (or start the engine), depress the available at the time of publication. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- brake pedal, press the button on the front side • Volvo reserves the right to make model fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or of the gear selector and move the selector from other reproductive harm. In addition, certain changes at any time, or to change spec- (P)ark. ifications or design without notice and fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or without incurring obligation. emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- Keylock (automatic transmission) • Do not export your Volvo to another fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or When you switch off the ignition, the gear country before investigating that coun- other reproductive harm. selector must be in the (P)ark position before try's applicable safety and emission the key can be removed from the ignition control requirements. In some cases it switch. may be difficult or impossible to comply WARNING with these requirements. Modifications Certain components of this vehicle such as Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) to the emission control system(s) may air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, The ABS system in your vehicle performs a render your Volvo not certifiable for adaptive steering columns, and button cell self-diagnostic test when the vehicle first rea- legal operation in the U.S., Canada and batteries may contain Perchlorate material. ches the speed of approximately 12 mph other countries. Special handling may apply for service or (20 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several vehicle end of life disposal. times and a sound may be audible from the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ ABS control module. This is normal. WARNING perchlorate. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, Fuel filler door unseen damage may affect its drivability Press the button on the light switch panel (see and safety. the illustration on page 66) when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- ward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks.

12 Introduction

Important information

Fuel filler cap Vehicle event data (Black box) The fuel filler door, located on the right rear Your vehicle's driving and safety systems fender, is connected to your vehicle's central employ computers that monitor, and share locking system. with each other, information about your vehi- cle's operation. One or more of these comput- Points to keep in mind ers may store what they monitor, either during • Do not export your Volvo to another coun- normal vehicle operation or in a crash or near- try before investigating that country's crash event. Stored information may be read applicable safety and exhaust emission and used by: requirements. In some cases it may be dif- ficult or impossible to comply with these • Volvo Car Corporation requirements. Modifications to the emis- • service and repair facilities sion control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in • law enforcement or government agencies the U.S., Canada and other countries. • others who may assert a legal right to • All information, illustrations and specifica- know, or who obtain your consent to know tions contained in this manual are based on such information. the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differ- ently, depending on special legal require- ments. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all mar- kets. • Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifi- cations or design without notice and with- out incurring obligation.

13 Introduction

Environment

Volvo and the environment cles and parts have fulfilled their use, recycling cator) light illuminates, or stays on after the Volvo is committed to the well being of its cus- is the next critical step in completing the life vehicle has started. tomers. As a natural part of this commitment, cycle. The metal content is about 75% of the • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related we care about the environment in which we all total weight of a vehicle, which makes the vehi- waste such as used motor oil, used batter- live. Caring for the environment means an cle among the most recycled industrial prod- ies, brake pads, etc. everyday involvement in reducing our environ- ucts. In order to have efficient and well-con- • When cleaning your vehicle, please use mental impact. Volvo's environmental activities trolled recycling, dismantling information is genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo are based on a holistic view, which means we available for all Volvo models. For Volvo, all car care products are formulated to be consider the overall environmental impact of a homogeneous plastic parts weighing more environmentally friendly. product throughout its complete life cycle. In than 3.4 oz. (100 grams) are marked with inter- this context, design, production, product use, national symbols that indicate how the com- and recycling are all important considerations. ponent is to be sorted for recycling. In addition In production, Volvo has partly or completely to continuous environmental refinement of phased out several chemicals including CFCs, conventional gasoline-powered internal com- lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and bustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at reduced the number of chemicals used in our advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. plants 50% since 1991. When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into ner in the work to lessen the car's impact on production a three-way catalytic converter with the environment. To reduce your vehicle's a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen environmental impact, you can: sensor, in 1976. The current version of this • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. highly efficient system reduces emissions of Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the omy with improperly inflated tires. exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and • Follow the recommended maintenance the search to eliminate the remaining emis- schedule in your Warranty and Service sions continues. Volvo is the only automobile Records Information booklet. manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- the air conditioning system of all models as far • sible. back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are • See a trained and qualified Volvo service bringing us closer to our goal. After Volvo vehi- technician as soon as possible for inspec- tion if the check engine (malfunction indi-

14 Introduction

Important warnings

Accessory Installation Information booklet for more warranty cellular telephone use by a driver while the • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners information. Volvo assumes no responsi- vehicle is moving. install only genuine, Volvo-approved bility for death, injury, or expenses that • If your vehicle is equipped with a naviga- accessories, and that accessory installa- may result from the installation of nonge- tion system, set and make changes to your tions be performed only by a trained and nuine accessories. travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. qualified Volvo service technician. • Never program your audio system while • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to Driver distraction the vehicle is moving. Program radio pre- ensure compatibility with the performance, • Driver distraction results from driver activ- sets with the vehicle parked, and use your safety, and emission systems in your vehi- ities that are not directly related to control- programmed presets to make radio use cle. Additionally, a trained and qualified ling the vehicle in the driving environment. quicker and simpler. Volvo service technician knows where Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped • Never use portable computers or personal accessories may and may not be safely with many feature-rich entertainment and digital assistants while the vehicle is mov- installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please communication systems. These include ing. consult a trained and qualified Volvo serv- hands-free cellular telephones, navigation ice technician before installing any acces- systems, and multipurpose audio systems. A driver has a responsibility to do everything sory in or on your vehicle. You may also own other portable elec- possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and oth- Accessories that have not been approved tronic devices for your own convenience. • ers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions by Volvo may or may not be specifically When used properly and safely, they enrich is part of that responsibility. tested for compatibility with your vehicle. the driving experience. Improperly used, Additionally, an inexperienced installer any of these could cause a distraction. may not be familiar with some of your vehi- • For all of these systems, we want to pro- cle's systems. vide the following warning that reflects the • Any of your vehicle's performance and strong Volvo concern for your safety: safety systems could be adversely affec- • Never use these devices or any feature of ted if you install accessories that Volvo has your vehicle in a way that distracts you not tested, or if you allow accessories to be from the task of driving safely. Distraction installed by someone unfamiliar with your can lead to a serious accident. In addition vehicle. to this general warning, we offer the fol- • Damage caused by unapproved or lowing guidance regarding specific newer improperly installed accessories may not features that may be found in your vehicle: be covered by your new vehicle warranty. • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone See your Warranty and Service Records while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit

15 16 Whiplash ProtectionSystem Child restraintregistrationand 48 Top tetheranchors...... ISOFIX loweranchors Booster cushions Convertible seats 41 Infant seats...... Child restraintsystems Child safety Crash mode Volvo InflatableCurtain Side impactprotection 28 Occupant WeightSensor(OWS)...... 23 Supplemental RestraintSystem...... 20 Seat belts...... 18 Occupant safety...... 37 ...... 36 ...... 43 ...... 45 ...... 46 ...... 39 ...... ibg...... 31 airbags...... (VIC)...... 34 ...... recalls ...... 49 ...... 32

G020871 SAFETY 01 01 Safety

01 Occupant safety

Volvo's concern for safety • Never drink and drive. However, NHTSA cannot become Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern • If you are taking any medication, consult involved in individual problems dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled your physician about its potential effects between you, your retailer, or Volvo on your driving abilities. off the production line. Three-point seat belts Cars of North America, LLC. To con- (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy- • Take a driver-retraining course. absorbing impact zones were designed into tact NHTSA, you may either call the • Have your eyes checked regularly. Volvo cars long before it was fashionable or Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at required by government regulation. • Keep your windshield and headlights 1-888-327-4236 clean. We will not compromise our commitment to Replace wiper blades when they start to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: safety. We continue to seek out new safety • leave streaks. features and to refine those already in our cars. NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- You can help. We would appreciate hearing • Take into account the traffic, road, and portation, Washington D.C. 20590. weather conditions, particularly with your suggestions about improving automobile You can also obtain other information safety. We also want to know if you ever have regard to stopping distance. a safety concern with your car. Call us in the about motor vehicle safety from: U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov 1-800-663-8255. If you believe that your vehicle has a Volvo strongly recommends that if defect which could cause a crash or Occupant safety reminders your vehicle is covered under a serv- could cause injury or death, you ice campaign, safety or emission How safely you drive doesn't depend on how should immediately inform the old you are but rather on: recall or similar action, it should be National Highway Traffic Safety completed as soon as possible. • How well you see. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Please check with your local retailer • Your ability to concentrate. notifying Volvo Cars of North Amer- or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC • How quickly you make decisions under ica, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar stress to avoid an accident. if your vehicle is covered under these complaints, it may open an investiga- conditions. The following suggestions are intended to help tion, and if it finds that a safety defect you cope with the ever changing traffic envi- NHTSA can be reached at: ronment. exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. Internet:

18 01 Safety

Occupant safety 01 http://www.nhtsa.gov Telephone: 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. To contact Transport Canada, call (800) 333-0510, or (613) 993-9851 if you are calling from the Ottawa region.

19 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

Using seat belts certain impacts from the rear. The front seat NOTE belts also include a tension reducing device which, in the event of a collision, limits the peak Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) forces exerted by the seat belt on the occu- is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat belt pant. taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, Buckling a seat belt a sound from the seat belt retractor will be Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch audible, which is normal, and the seat belt plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is will be pulled taut and locked in place. This heard. The seat belt retractor is normally function is automatically disabled when the "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. The seat belt retractor will lock up in the fol- See also page 38 for information about using lowing situations: a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a

G020104 child seat. • if the belt is pulled out rapidly Adjusting the seat belt • during braking and acceleration When wearing the seat belt remember: Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- • if the vehicle is leaning excessively • The belt should not be twisted or turned. pants of your vehicle. Children should be prop- • when driving in turns • The lap section of the belt must be posi- erly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster tioned low on the hips (not pressing against seat determined by age, weight and height. • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- the abdomen). gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is acti- Volvo also believes no child should sit in the vated • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled front seat of a vehicle. up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. Unbuckling the seat belt • To remove the seat belt, press the red sec- Seat belt pretensioners tion on the seat belt receptacle. Before The outboard seat belts are equipped with pre- exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt tensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These retracts fully after being unbuckled. If nec- pretensioners are triggered in situations where essary, guide the belt back into the retrac- the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in tor slot.

20 01 Safety

Seat belts 01

WARNING Seat belt use during pregnancy steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large Never use a seat belt for more than one a distance as possible between their belly and occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion the steering wheel. of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As Child seats seat belts lose much of their strength when Please refer to page 39 for information on exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they securing child seats with the seat belts. appear to be undamaged. Seat belt reminder WARNING • Never repair the belt yourself; have this work done by a trained and qualified G020105 Volvo service technician only. • Any device used to induce slack into the The seat belt should always be worn during shoulder belt portion of the three-point pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the belt system will have a detrimental correct way. The diagonal section should wrap effect on the amount of protection avail- over the shoulder then be routed between the able to you in the event of a collision. breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap • The seat back should not be tilted too section should lay flat over the thighs and as far back. The shoulder belt must be taut low as possible under the belly. It must never in order to function properly. be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack • Do not use child safety seats or child from the belt and insure that it fits close to the G018084 body without any twists. booster cushions/backrests in the front Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console passenger's seat. We also recommend As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers that children who have outgrown these The seat belt reminder consists of an audible should adjust their seats and steering wheel devices sit in the rear seat with the seat signal, an indicator light near the rearview mir- such that they can easily maintain control of the belt properly fastened. ror and a symbol in the instrument panel that vehicle as they drive (which means they must alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their be able to easily operate the foot pedals and



21 01 Safety

01 Seat belts

seat belts. The audible signal and warning light by pressing the READ button to display stored will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time messages. the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened. Seat belt maintenance If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the Check periodically that the seat belts are in vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and good condition. Use water and a mild deter- warning light will be active for a total of 6 sec- gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism onds. function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions: • It provides information about which seat belts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes- sage will appear in the information display when a belt is being used or if one of the rear doors has been opened. This message will disappear after approximately 6 sec- onds or can be erased by pressing the READ button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. The message in the information display can always be accessed, even if it has been erased,

22 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Where applicable, a text message will also be WARNING displayed when the SRS warning light illumi- nates. If this warning symbol is not functioning If your vehicle has been subjected to flood properly, the general warning symbol illumi- conditions (e.g. soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your nates and either SRS AIRBAG SERVICE vehicle has become flood-damaged in any URGENT or SRS AIRBAG SERVICE way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or REQUIREDwill be displayed. put the key in the ignition before discon- necting the battery (see below). This may WARNING cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to • If the SRS warning light stays on after a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- the engine has started or if it illuminates nician for repairs. while you are driving, have the vehicle Automatic transmission inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as Before attempting to tow the vehicle, use G026330 possible. the following procedure to override the shiftlock system to move the gear selector SRS warning light • Never try to repair any component or to the neutral position: part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- As an enhancement to the three-point seat 1. Switch off the ignition for at least ence in the system could cause mal- belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supple- 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. function and serious injury. All work on mental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS these systems should be performed by 2. Wait at least one minute. consists of seat belt pretensioners, front air- a trained and qualified Volvo service bags, side impact airbags, the occupant 3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn it technician. weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of to position II. these systems are monitored by the SRS con- 4. Press firmly on the brake pedal. trol module. An SRS warning light in the instru- 5. Move the gear selector from Park (P) to ment panel (see the illustration) illuminates the Neutral (N) position, see page 151, when the ignition key is turned to position I, II, for information on manually overriding or III, and will normally go out after approxi- the shiftlock system. mately 7 seconds if no faults are detected in the system.



23 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

The front airbag system • The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. • The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment. G020111 G015167

The front airbags supplement the three-point Location of the passenger's side front airbag seat belts. For these airbags to provide the As the movement of the seats' occupants com- protection intended, seat belts must be worn presses the airbags, some of the gas is expel- at all times. led at a controlled rate to provide better cush- The front airbag system includes gas genera- ioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire tion sensors that activate the gas generators, process, including inflation and deflation of the causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a sec- gas. ond. The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash.

24 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

WARNING Front airbag deployment NOTE The front airbags are designed to deploy The airbags in the vehicle are designed • Deployment of front airbags occurs only • during certain frontal or front-angular col- • to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a replace- one time during an accident. In a colli- lisions, impacts, or decelerations, depend- ment for-the three-point seat belts. For sion where deployment occurs, the air- ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and maximum protection, wear seat belts at bags and seat belt pretensioners acti- object impacted. The airbags may also all times. Be aware that no system can vate. Some noise occurs and a small deploy in certain non-frontal collisions prevent all possible injuries that may amount of powder is released. The where rapid deceleration occurs. occur in an accident. release of the powder may appear as The SRS sensors, which trigger the front Never drive a vehicle with a steering • smoke-like matter. This is a normal • airbags, are designed to react to both the wheel-mounted airbag with your hands characteristic and does not indicate fire. impact of the collision and the inertial on the steering wheel pad/airbag hous- Volvo's front airbags use special sen- forces generated by it, and to determine if • ing. sors that are integrated with the front the intensity of the collision is sufficient for seat buckles. The point at which the air- • The front airbags are designed to help the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags bag deploys is determined by whether prevent serious injury. Deployment to be deployed. occurs very quickly and with consider- or not the seat belt is being used, as well However, not all frontal collisions activate the able force. During normal deployment as the severity of the collision. front airbags. and depending on variables such as • Collisions can occur where only one of seating position, one may experience • If the collision involves a nonrigid object the airbags deploys. If the impact is less abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed severe, but severe enough to present a injuries as a result from deployment of object at a low speed, the front airbags will clear injury risk, the airbags are trig- one or both of the airbags. not necessarily deploy. gered at partial capacity. If the impact is • When installing any accessory equip- • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a more severe, the airbags are triggered ment, make sure that the front airbag side impact collision, in a collision from the at full capacity. system is not damaged. Any interfer- rear or in a rollover situation. ence in the system could cause mal- • The amount of damage to the bodywork Should you have questions about any compo- function. does not reliably indicate if the airbags nent in the SRS system, please contact a should have deployed or not. trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo Customer Support: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC



25 01 Safety

01 Supplemental Restraint System

Customer Care Center WARNING 1 Volvo Drive • Do not use child safety seats or child P.O. Box 914 booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches 1-800-458-1552 (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the www.volvocars.us seat belt fastened1. In Canada • Never drive with the airbags deployed. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other National Customer Service safety systems can also be damaged.

175 Gordon Baker Road • The smoke and dust formed when the G032525 airbags are deployed can cause skin North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 Airbag decal on passenger's side dashboard and eye irritation in the event of pro- 1-800-663-8255 longed exposure. www.volvocanada.com

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 28.

26 01 Safety

Supplemental Restraint System 01

WARNING WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment, front passenger's seat. Volvo recom- e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed mends that ALL occupants (adults and on, attached to, or installed near the air children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches bag hatch (the area above the glove (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of compartment) or the area affected by any vehicle with a passenger-side front airbag deployment. airbag. See page 38 for guidelines. • There should be no loose articles, e.g. • Occupants in the front passenger's seat coffee cups, on the floor, seat, or dash- must never sit on the edge of the seat, board area. sit leaning toward the instrument panel • Never try to open the airbag cover on or otherwise sit out of position. the steering wheel or the passenger's

G032934 • The occupant's back must be as upright side dashboard. This should only be as comfort allows and be against the done by a trained and qualified Volvo Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors seat back with the seat belt properly service technician. fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on result in injury to the vehicle occupants. the dash, seat or out of the window.

27 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

Disabling the passenger's side front not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF airbag under certain conditions. indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front The OWS works with sensors that are part of airbag is disabled. The the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp is located in the overhead sensors are designed to detect the presence of OFF 2 console, near the base of the rearview mirror. a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not NOTE inflate). When the ignition is switched on, the OWS The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic senger's side front airbag when: test. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in the front However, if a fault is detected in the system: seat,

G018082 The OWS indicator light will stay on • the system determines that an infant is • The SRS warning light (see page 23) will Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light present in a rear-facing infant seat that is • installed according to the manufacturer's come on and stay on Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults instructions, The message PASS. AIRBAG OFF SERVICE and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches the system determines that a small child is URGENTwill be displayed in the information (140 cm) be seated in the rear seat of any vehi- • present in a forward-facing child restraint display. cle with a passenger's side front airbag, and be that is installed according to the manufac- properly restrained. Children should always be turer's instructions, seated in child restraints appropriate for their size and weight. See also the child safety rec- • the system determines that a small child is ommendations on page 37. present in a booster seat, • a front passenger takes his/her weight off The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is of the seat for a period of time, designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard • a child or a small person occupies the front (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will passenger's seat.

28 01 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) 01

WARNING passenger's side front airbag is disabled (see sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. the following table). The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator If a fault in the system is detected and indi- lamp will be off and remain off. cated as explained on the preceding page, be aware that the passenger's side front air- Passenger's OWS indica- Passenger's If a person of adult size is sitting in the front bag will not deploy in the event of a collision. seat occu- tor light sta- side front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER In this case, the SRS system and Occupant pancy status tus airbag sta- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible Weight Sensor should be inspected by a tus that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- If this happens: cian as soon as possible. Seat unoc- OWS indica- Passenger's cupied tor light side front 1. Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to lights airbag disa- place the seatback in an upright position. WARNING bled up 2. Have the person sit upright in the seat, • Never try to open, remove, or repair any centered on the seat cushion, with the per- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's components in the OWS system. This son's legs comfortably extended. could result in system malfunction. pied by low tor light side front Maintenance or repairs should only be weight lights airbag disa- 3. Restart the vehicle and have the person carried out by an a trained and qualified occupant/ up bled remain in this position for about two Volvo service technician. objectA minutes. This will allow the system to • The front passenger's seat should not detect that person and enable the pas- Seat occu- OWS indica- Passenger's be modified in any way. This could senger's frontal airbag. pied by tor light side front reduce pressure on the seat cushion, 4. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator heavy occu- is not airbag ena- which might interfere with the OWS sys- lamp remains on even after this, the person pant/object lit bled tem's function. should be advised to ride in the rear seat. A Volvo recommends that children always be properly This condition reflects limitations of the OWS The OWS is designed to disable (will not inflate) restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled classification capability. It does not indicate the passenger's side front airbag when a rear unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is OWS malfunction. facing infant seat, a forward-facing child any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front air- restraint, or a booster seat is detected. The bag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. Modifications PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) If you are considering modifying your vehicle in illuminate and stay on to remind you that the the passenger's side front airbag anytime the any way to accommodate a disability, for system senses that a person of adult size is example by altering or adapting the driver's or



29 01 Safety

01 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS)

front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- WARNING WARNING tems, please contact Volvo at: • No objects that add to the total weight Keep the following points in mind with In the USA on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow Volvo Cars of North America, LLC front passenger's seat. If a child is these instructions could adversely affect the seated in the front passenger's seat system's function and result in serious injury Customer Care Center with any additional weight, this extra to the occupant of the front passenger's seat: 1 Volvo Drive weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it • The full weight of the front seat passen- P.O. Box 914 to deploy in the event of a collision, ger should always be on the seat cush- Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 thereby injuring the child. ion. The passenger should never lift him/herself off the seat cushion using 1-800-458-1552 • The seat belt should never be wrapped around an object on the front passeng- the armrest in the door or the center In Canada er's seat. This could interfere with the console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. cushion, or by pressing against the • The front passenger's seat belt should National Customer Service backrest in a way that reduces pressure never be used in a way that exerts more on the seat cushion. This could cause 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario pressure on the passenger than normal. OWS to disable the passenger's side M2H 2N7 This could increase the pressure exer- front airbag. ted on the weight sensor by a child, and 1-800-663-8255 could result in the airbag being enabled, • Do not place any type of object on the which might cause it to deploy in the front passenger's seat in such a way event of a collision, thereby injuring the that jamming, pressing, or squeezing child. occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retrac- tor (ALR/ELR) seat belt, see page 38. • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could inter- fere with the OWS system's function.

30 01 Safety

Side impact protection airbags 01

Side impact airbags – front seats only WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supple- ment to the structural Side Impact Pro- tection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the car or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system

G025315 or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. G020118 SIPS airbag deployment • Never try to open or repair any compo- Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbag NOTE nents of the SIPS airbag system. This As an enhancement to the structural side should be done only by a trained and impact protection built into your car, the car is SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs qualified Volvo service technician. also equipped with Side Impact Protection only on the side of the vehicle affected by • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide System (SIPS) airbags. the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. its best protection, both front seat The SIPS airbag system is designed to help occupants should sit in an upright posi- increase occupant protection in the event of tion with the seat belt properly fastened. Components in the SIPS airbag system certain side impact collisions. The SIPS air- • Failure to follow these instructions can This SIPS airbag system consists of gas gen- bags are designed to deploy only during cer- result in injury to the occupants of the erators and side airbag modules built into the tain side-impact collisions, depending on the vehicle in the event of an accident. outboard sides of both front seat backrests. crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.

31 01 Safety

01 Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC)

The Volvo Inflatable Curtain system G015265

This system consists of inflatable curtains NOTE WARNING located along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from the center of both front side If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains • The VIC system is a supplement to the windows to the rear edge of the rear side door inflated for approximately 3 seconds. Side Impact Protection System. It is not windows. It is designed to help protect the designed to deploy during collisions heads of the occupants of the front seats and from the front or rear of the car or in roll- the occupant of the outboard rear seating posi- over situations. tions in certain side impact collisions. • Never try to open or repair any compo- nents of the VIC system. This should be In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Cur- done only by a trained and qualified tain (VIC) and the Side Impact Airbag System Volvo service technician. (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The VIC and the SIPS Never hang heavy items from the ceiling airbag deploy simultaneously. • handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable curtain.

32 01 Safety

Volvo Inflatable Curtain (VIC) 01

WARNING In order for the VIC to provide its best pro- tection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt prop- erly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint sys- tem. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger's seat, see page 38 for guide- lines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident.

33 01 Safety

01 Whiplash Protection System

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only G020347

The WHIPS system consists of specially WARNING WARNING designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the • The WHIPS system is designed to sup- • Occupants in the front seats must never energy generated in a collision from the rear plement the other safety systems in sit out of position. The occupant's back (when the vehicle is "rearended"). your car. For this system to function must be as upright as comfort allows properly, the three-point seat belt must and be against the seat back with the In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges be worn. Please be aware that no sys- seat belt properly fastened. and brackets of the front seat backrests are tem can prevent all possible injuries that • If your car has been involved in a rear- designed to change position slightly to allow may occur in an accident. end collision, the front seat backrests the backrest/head restraint to help support the • The WHIPS system is designed to func- must be inspected by a trained and occupant's head before moving slightly rear- tion in certain collisions from the rear, qualified Volvo service technician, even ward. This movement helps absorb some of depending on the crash severity, angle if the seats appear to be undamaged. the forces that could result in whiplash. and speed.

34 01 Safety

Whiplash Protection System 01

Certain components in the WHIPS sys- tem may need to be replaced. • Do not attempt to service any compo- nent in the WHIPS system yourself. G020125

WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the front seats could impede the func- G020126 tion of the WHIPS system. • If the rear seat backrests are folded WARNING down, cargo must be secured to pre- Any contact between the front seat backr- vent it from sliding forward against the ests and the folded rear seat could impede front seat backrests in the event of a the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear collision from the rear. This could inter- seat is folded down, the occupied front fere with the action of the WHIPS sys- seats must be adjusted forward so that they tem. do not touch the folded rear seat.

35 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

Driving after a collision fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety sys- 3. Try to start the vehicle. tems, the brake system, etc. Moving the vehicle WARNING If the electrical system is able to reset system status to normal (CRASH MODE SEE • Never attempt to repair the vehicle MANUAL will no longer be displayed), the yourself or to reset the electrical system vehicle may be moved carefully from its pres- after the vehicle has displayed CRASH ent position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. MODE SEE MANUAL. This could It should, however, not be moved farther than result in injury or improper system func- is absolutely necessary. tion. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- WARNING ing mode should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable nician. after CRASH MODE has been set, it should G026363 not be driven or towed (pulled by another • After CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL vehicle). There may be concealed damage If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, has been displayed, if you detect the that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and quali- appear in the information display. This indi- vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. fied Volvo service technician for inspection/ cates that the vehicle's functionality has been repairs. reduced. Attempting to start the vehicle This text can only be shown if the display is If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the is intact. vehicle. To do so: CRASH MODE is a feature that is triggered if 1. Remove the ignition key or optional keyless one or more of the safety systems (for example, drive start control, see page 146. front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has 2. Reinsert the key or start control in the igni- deployed. The collision may have damaged an tion switch. The vehicle will then attempt to important function in the vehicle, such as the reset CRASH MODE to normal mode.

36 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should be seated safely restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring When a child has outgrown the child safety Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint or increasing the injury of a child. seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to systems for all occupants including children. All states and provinces have legislation gov- help protect the child here is to place the child Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly child should always be properly restrained in a ried in a car. Find out the regulations existing located on the hips (see the illustration on page car. in your state or province. Recent accident sta- 45). Legislation in your state or province may tistics have shown that children are safer in rear Your car is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in seating positions than front seating positions attachments, which make it more convenient combination with the seat belt, depending on when properly restrained. A child restraint sys- to install child seats. the child's age and/or size. Please check local tem can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's regulations. Some restraint systems for children are what to look for when selecting a child restraint designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap system: A specially designed and tested booster cush- belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. ion can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. Such child restraint systems can help protect • It should have a label certifying that it children in cars in the event of an accident only meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle USA: for children weighing 33–80 lbs. (15– if they are used properly. However, children Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Can- 36 kg) and 38–54 inches (97–137 cm) in height ada, CMVSS 213. could be endangered in a crash if the child Canada: for children weighing 40–80 lbs. (18– restraints are not properly secured in the vehi- • Make sure the child restraint system is 36 kg) and 40–54 inches (102–137 cm) in height cle. Failure to follow the installation instructions approved for the child's height, weight and development – the label required by the for your child restraint can result in your child WARNING striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this infor- Do not use child safety seats or child Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable mation. booster cushions/backrests in the front substitute for a child restraint system. In an • In using any child restraint system, we urge passenger's seat. We also recommend that accident, a child held in a person's arms can children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in you to carefully look over the instructions be crushed between the vehicle's interior and height who have outgrown these devices sit that are provided with the restraint. Be sure in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. an unrestrained person. The child could also be you understand them and can use the injured by striking the interior, or by being ejec- device properly and safely in this vehicle. ted from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver A misused child restraint system can result or impact. The same can also happen if the in increased injuries for both the infant or infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. child and other occupants in the vehicle. Other occupants should also be properly



37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Automatic Locking Retractor/ WARNING Volvo recommends that you do not dis- Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ connect the airbag system in your vehicle. ELR) Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone To make child seat installation easier, each passenger's seat. We also recommend that in the vehicle be properly restrained. seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- children who have outgrown these devices • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet seat belt taut. fastened. 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger When attaching the seat belt to a child Volvo's recommendations side airbag. seat: Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit • Drive safely! 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. according to the child seat manufacturer's A front airbag is a very powerful device instructions. designed, by law, to help protect an adult. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the of inflation, a child should never be placed in buckle (lock) in the usual way. the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around has been an innovator in safety for over sev- the child seat. enty-five years, and we'll continue to do our A sound from the seat belt retractor will be part. But we need your help. Please remember audible at this time and is normal. The belt will to put your children in the back seat, and now be locked in place. This function is auto- buckle them up. matically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. Volvo has some very specific recommendations: • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents.

38 01 Safety

Child restraint systems 01

Child restraints G026503 G026489

G026491 Convertible seat Infant seat WARNING WARNING There are three main types of child restraint Always refer to the child restraint manufac- systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and A child seat should never be used in the turer's instructions for detailed information booster cushions. They are classified accord- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a on securing the restraint. ing to the child's age and size. front passenger airbag – not even if the Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear- The following section provides general infor- view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equip- mation on securing a child restraint using a ped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the three-point seat belt. Refer to pages pages severity of an accident were to cause the 46–48 for information on securing a child airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or tion. top tether anchorages.



39 01 Safety

01 Child restraint systems

WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help pre- vent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that chil- dren should ride rearward facing, prop- erly restrained, as long as possible.

40 01 Safety

Infant seats 01

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. G026492

G026417 Fasten the seat belt Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng- G026493 er's seat Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat WARNING A child seat should never be used in the NOTE 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the Refer to pages 46–48 for information on tions. securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear- anchors and/or top tether anchorages. view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equip- ped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the WARNING airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing tion. position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch behind the driver's seat unless there is plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct adequate space for safe installation. click is audible.



41 01 Safety

01 Infant seats

and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026494

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. WARNING NOTE It should not be possible to move the child The locking retractor will automatically restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) release when the seat belt is unbuckled and in any direction along the seat belt path. allowed to retract fully. 6. Push and pull the infant seat to ensure that 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the it is held securely in place by the seat belt. seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound 7. The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- from the seat belt retractor's automatic ling the seat belt and letting it retract com- locking function will be audible at this time pletely.

42 01 Safety

Convertible seats 01

Securing a convertible seat with a seat WARNING WARNING belt Always use a convertible seat that is suita- A small child's head represents a consider- ble for the child's age and size. See the con- able part of its total weight and its neck is vertible seat manufacturer's recommenda- still very weak. Volvo recommends that chil- tions. dren up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recom- mends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as pos- sible.

WARNING • Convertible child seats should be instal- led in the rear seat only. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not

G026420 be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- installation. senger's seat

NOTE G026503 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. Refer to pages 46–48 for information on Route the seat belt through the convertible seat securing a child restraint using ISOFIX lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for- ward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.



43 01 Safety

01 Convertible seats

NOTE WARNING The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled and restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) allowed to retract fully. in any direction along the seat belt path.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, The convertible seat can be removed by let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. matic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G026500

Fasten the seat belt 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- tions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's Ensure that the seat is securely in place automatic locking function. G026501

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt.

44 01 Safety

Booster cushions 01

Securing a booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for chil- dren who have outgrown convertible seats. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the man- ufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child. G026489

Position the child correctly on the booster cushion WARNING and fasten the seat belt • The hip section of the three-point seat WARNING belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a • The shoulder section of the three-point front passenger airbag – not even if the seat belt should be positioned across Passenger airbag off symbol near the rear- the chest and shoulder. view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equip- • The shoulder belt must never be placed ped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the behind the child's back or under the severity of an accident were to cause the arm. airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this posi- tion.

45 01 Safety

01 ISOFIX lower anchors

Using the ISOFIX lower child seat 3. Fasten the attachment on the child WARNING anchors restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX lower anchors. • The ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors are only intended for use with 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps child seats positioned in the outboard according to the manufacturer's instruc- seating positions. These anchors are tions. not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center NOTE seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, • The rear seat's center position is not use only the vehicle's center seat belt. equipped with ISOFIX lower anchors. When installing a child restraint in this position, attach the restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage point (see page 48) and secure the restraint with the vehi- G015268 cle's center seat belt (see page 39). ISOFIX lower child restraint anchors • Always follow your child seat manufac- Lower anchors for ISOFIX-equipped child turer's installation instructions, and use seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, both ISOFIX lower anchors and top hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols tethers whenever possible. on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor positions (see the illustration).

To access the anchors:

1. Put the child restraint in position. G031682 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX the seat cushion and locate the anchors by lower anchors feel.

46 01 Safety

ISOFIX lower anchors 01

WARNING Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision.

47 01 Safety

01 Top tether anchors

Top tether anchors See page 46 for information on securing the child restraint to ISOFIX lower anchors.

WARNING • Never route a top tether strap over the top or around the head restraint. It should always be routed under the head restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The G026487 anchorages are not able to withstand G029703 Route the strap under the head restraint excessive forces on them in the event of Top tether anchorage points collision if full harness seat belts or adult WARNING seat belts are installed to them. An adult Volvo vehicles are equipped with child restraint who uses a belt anchored in a child top tether anchorages in the rear seating posi- Be sure to fasten the child tether attachment restraint anchorage runs a great risk of correctly to the anchor. If it is not correctly tions. They are located on the rear sides of the suffering severe injuries should a colli- backrests. fastened, the child seat may not be properly restrained in the event of a collision. sion occur. Using the top tether anchorages • Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. 3. Route the top tether strap under the head interfere with the proper use of the top restraint and fasten its attachment to the 2. Release the backrest and tilt it forward to tether strap. access the anchorage. Attach the hook to anchorage. the anchorage. Return the seat back to the 4. Firmly tension the top tether strap accord- upright position and make sure it locks in ing to the child restraint manufacturer's place. instructions. Tension the top tether strap only after the lower anchor straps or the seat belt have been firmly tensioned.

48 01 Safety

Child restraint registration and recalls 01

Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily avail- able in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Govern- ment's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

49 50 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. HomeLink® WirelessControl Personal settings Power moonroof* 78 Mirrors...... 76 Power windows...... Steering wheeladjustment,Hazard Right-side steeringwheel Cruise control* 69 Trip computer...... Left-side steeringwheel 64 Lighting panel...... 12-volt sockets...... 61 Information display...... 58 Symbols –instrumentpanel...... Indicator andwarning Instrument panel 52 Instrument overview...... 71 ...... 54 ...... 83 ...... 81 ...... ybl...... 56 symbols...... ee...... 67 lever...... ee...... 73 lever...... System* warning flashers ...... 86 ...... 63 ...... 75 ......

G020901 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 02 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

02 G019488

52 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Steering wheel adjustment Courtesy lighting switch Position for optional equipment 02 Hood opener Driver's side reading light Position for optional equipment

Controls in front doors Passenger's side reading light Control panel in driver's door Left steering wheel lever Seat belt reminder and Occupant Weight Sensor indicator Lighting panel, fuel filler door opener Rear-view mirror Door open handle and locking button Display for climate control, personal Climate system air vent settings, and audio system

Side window air vent Audio system

Cruise control Controls for personal settings and audio system Horn, airbag Controls for climate system Main instrument panel Gear selector Audio controls Hazard warning flashers Lockout switch for rear windows Right steering wheel lever Door open handle, and locking button Power windows Ignition switch Glove compartment Door mirror button, driver's side Moonroof control* Parking brake Door mirror adjustment control Not in use 12-volt socket Door mirror button, passenger's side Not is use

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel

Instrument panel

02 1 2 3 4 5 67

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 G031465

Speedometer the temperature readings may be slightly sively high engines speeds. This will be higher than the actual ambient tempera- noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in Turn signal, left ture. engine speed. Warning symbol – See the following pages Information symbol – See the following Indicator and information symbols for additional information. pages for additional information. Fuel gauge, see page 271 for fuel tank vol- Information display – The display presents Turn signal, right ume. When a warning light in the gauge information and warning messages, the Tachometer – Shows engine speed in comes on, the vehicle should be refueled ambient temperature, clock, etc. When the as soon as possible, see page 69 for ambient temperature is between 23 °F and thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously with the needle more information on fuel level and con- 36 °F (–5 °C and +2 °C), a snowflake sym- sumption in the "Trip computer” section. bol is shown in the display. This symbol in the red area of the dial, which indicates serves as a warning for possible slippery maximum allowable engine rpm range. High beam indicator road surfaces. Please note that this symbol Instead, shift to a higher gear or slow the vehicle down. The engine management Function display – This window displays does not indicate a fault with your car. At information on functions such as the low speeds, or when the car is not moving, system will automatically prevent exces-

54 02 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel odometer, trip odometers, optional rain sensor, and cruise control. 02 Trip odometer reset button – The trip odometers are used to measure short dis- tances. Press the button briefly to switch between the odometer for the car's total mileage and the two trip odometers, T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets the currently selected trip odometer. Temperature gauge – The gauge indicates the temperature of the engine cooling sys- tem. If the temperature is abnormally high and the needle enters the red zone, a mes- sage is shown in the display. Bear in mind that auxiliary lamps in front of the air intake reduce the cooling capacity at high outside temperatures and high engine loads. Indicator and warning symbols

55 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Function check Symbols in the center of the instrument If the red warning symbol lights up: The indicator and warning symbols1 light up panel 02 1. Stop the car as soon as possible in a suit- when you turn the ignition key or the optional able location. keyless drive start control to the driving posi- 2. Read the message in the information dis- tion (position II) before starting. This shows that play. the symbols are functioning. 3. Follow the instructions provided, or con- When the engine starts, all sym- tact a trained and qualified Volvo service bols go out. If the engine is not technician. Erase the message by pressing started within 5 seconds, all of the , see page 61. symbols except the malfunction READ indicator light (CHECK ENGINE) Information symbol and the oil pressure warning light The yellow information symbol will go out. Certain symbols may lights up to alert the driver to a not have their functions illustrated, depending message in the information dis- on the car's equipment. G026365 play. This symbol illuminates when The PARK BRAKE symbol will not go out until the vehicle is traveling at speeds below 5 mph (7 km/h). the parking brake has been released. Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up The message can be erased by pressing the to indicate a fault that could affect READ button, see page 61, or will disappear the car's drivability.This symbol automatically (the length of time required for illuminates when the vehicle is the message to disappear varies, depending traveling at speeds above 5 mph on the function indicated). (7 km/h). A text explaining the nature of the fault When the message "TIME FOR REGULAR will also be shown in the information display. MAINTENANCE" is displayed, the text can be The symbol and accompanying text will remain erased and the information symbol light can be on until the fault has been corrected. This sym- turned off by pressing the READ button. The bol may also light up in combination with other text will disappear and the symbol light will go indicator or warning symbols. out automatically after two minutes.

1 On certain engines, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see page 217.

56 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

This symbol may also light up in combination with other indicator or warning symbols. 02 NOTE The car can still be driven after the informa- tion symbol has come on. The car can be driven for 1–2 weeks after service-related information has been displayed.

57 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – left side A CHECK ENGINE light may have many cau- 3. Rear fog light ses. Sometimes, you may not notice a change This symbol indicates that the rear 02 in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected fog light (located in the driver's condition could hurt fuel economy, emission side taillight cluster) is on. controls, and drivability. Extended driving with- out correcting the cause could even damage other components in your car. 4. Stability system STC or DSTC This indicator symbol flashes when NOTE the STC (Stability and Traction Canadian models are equipped with the control system) or the DSTC second symbol. (Dynamic Stability and Traction control system) is actively working to stabilize the car, see page 157 for more 2. Anti-lock Brake system (ABS) detailed information.

G026439 If the warning light comes on, there is a malfunction of the ABS system 5. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (the standard braking system will This system monitors inflation 1. Malfunction indicator light still function). pressure in the tires. See page The vehicle should be driven to a 199 for more information. trained and qualified Volvo service As you drive, a computer called technician for inspection, see On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) page 153 for additional informa- 6. Fuel level warning light monitors your car's engine, trans- tion. When this light comes on, the vehi- mission, electrical and emission cle should be refueled as soon as systems. NOTE possible. The CHECK ENGINE light will light up if the Canadian models are equipped with the computer senses a condition that potentially second symbol. may need correcting. When this happens, please have your car checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

58 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

Symbols – right side 2. Parking brake applied 4. Oil pressure warning light1 This light is on when the parking If the light comes on while driving, brake (hand brake) is applied. The the car, stop the engine immedi- 02 parking brake lever is situated ately, and check the engine oil between the front seats, see level. If the oil level is normal and page 156 for more information. the light stays on after restart, have the car towed to the nearest trained and quali- fied Volvo service technician. After hard driv- ing, the light may come on occasionally when the engine is idling. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased. NOTE 5. Seat belt reminder Canadian models are equipped with the second symbol. This symbol (and the seat belt

G026438 reminder light above the rear view mirror) will light up if either front 3. SRS system warning light seat occupant has not buckled his/ 1. Turn signal indicator for trailer (certain If this light comes on while the car her seat belt. If the car is not mov- markets only) is being driven, or remains on for ing, the symbols will go out after approximately If you are towing a trailer, this light longer than approximately 10 sec- 6 seconds. will flash simultaneously with the onds after the car has been turn signals on the trailer. If the started, the SRS system's diag- 6. Generator warning light light does not flash when signaling, nostic functions have detected a fault in a seat If the light comes on while the one of the turn signals on the trailer belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side engine is running, have the charg- or on the car are not functioning properly. impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. ing system checked by an author- Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and ized Volvo workshop. qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible.

1 On certain engines, this symbol is not used to indicate low oil pressure. Instead, a text warning is provided in the information display, see also page 217. 

59 02 Instruments and controls

Symbols – instrument panel

7. Brake failure warning light 2. Restart the engine. Hood and trunk If this light comes on while driving If the hood and/or trunk is not com- 02 3. If both warning lights go off, no further or braking, stop the car as quickly action is required and the car can be pletely closed, the Information as possible in a safe place, open driven. symbol in the instrument panel will the hood, and check the brake fluid light up and a message will be dis- level in the reservoir, see 4. If both lights remain on after the engine has played, regardless of the vehicle's page 216 for the location of the been restarted, switch off the engine again speed. reservoir. and check the brake fluid level, see page 216 for the location of the reservoir.

Door open warning NOTE The driver will be alerted if one of the doors, the Canadian models are equipped with the hood or the trunk are open or ajar. second symbol. At low speeds If the car is moving at a speed of WARNING less than approximately 3 mph If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the (5 km/h), the Information symbol in reservoir or if a BRAKE FAILURE STOP the instrument panel will light up SAFELY message is displayed in the infor- and a message will be shown in the mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the information display indicating which door(s), car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo etc is not completely closed. service technician and have the brake sys- tem inspected. At higher speeds If the car is moving at a speed If the BRAKES and ABS warning lights come above approximately 6 mph on at the same time, this could indicate a fault (10 km/h), the Warning symbol in in the brake system. the instrument panel will light up and a message will be shown in the In this case: information display indicating which door(s), 1. Stop the car in a suitable place and switch etc is not completely closed. off the engine.

60 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Messages NOTE Message Meaning If a message is displayed when e.g. you are .....SERVICE Take your car to a 02 using the trip computer, this message must A be read before you can access the trip com- REQUIRED trained and qualified puter. Volvo service techni- cian for inspection as soon as possible (but Message Meaning preferably before the next scheduled mainte- .....STOP Stop the vehicle in a nance service). SAFELYA safe place and switch off the engine to help BOOK TIME Book time for service at prevent the risk of seri- FOR MAINTE- an authorized Volvo ous damage. NANCE workshop.

G019617 HIGH ENGINE Stop the vehicle in a TIME FOR This message is affec- TEMP STOP safe place and switch REGULAR ted by the number of When an indicator or warning light in the instru- SAFELY off the engine to help MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the ment panel comes on, a message is also prevent the risk of seri- NANCE number of months, or shown in the information display. To read a ous damage. by the number of engine message: hours since the service ...... SERVICE Take your car to a reminder was reset at 1. Press the READ button (1). A URGENT trained and qualified the most recent regu- 2. Pressing READ repeatedly enables you to Volvo service techni- larly scheduled service. scroll to any other messages that may be cian for inspection stored. immediately. MAINTE- If the vehicle is not serv- NANCE OVER- iced according to ...... SEE MAN- Refer to your owner's schedule, the warranty A DUE UAL manual. For additional may not apply to dam- information, please aged parts, etc. contact your Volvo retailer.



61 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message Meaning 02 TIME FOR This message is affec- REGULAR ted by the number of MAINTE- miles/km driven, by the NANCE number of months, or by the number of engine hours since the service reminder was reset at the most recent regu- larly scheduled service.

REMINDER Stop as soon as possi- CHECK OIL ble and switch off the LEVEL engine, check the oil level and top up if nec- essary, see page 217.

A This is part of the message. Additional information will also be displayed.

62 02 Instruments and controls

12-volt sockets

12-volt socket (front seat) NOTE The cover should be kept on when the aux- 02 iliary socket is not in use.

Auxiliary equipment The buttons to the left of the 12-volt socket can be used for Volvo-installed optional or auxiliary equipment.

12-volt socket (rear seat) G026349

12-volt socket, auxiliary equipment The 12-volt socket can be used to plug in cer- tain accessories such as cellular telephones, etc. The maximum current is 10 A. The key must be in position I (or higher) for the auxiliary socket to function.

Ashtrays/cigarette lighter The auxiliary socket can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters G029082 and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. NOTE The 12-volt socket in the rear seat cannot function as a cigarette lighter.

63 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Parking lights Pos. Lighting Active Bending Lights (ABL)* 02 Daytime running lights off. High beam flash only.

Parking lights

Daytime running lights. High beams and high beam flash can be used in this position.

The front and rear parking lights can be turned on even when the ignition is switched off. G026415 Turn switch (1) to the parking light position. G026507 The license plate lights also illuminate when the Light switch Lighting panel, vehicles with Active Bending head- parking lights are switched on. lights Thumb wheel for adjusting brightness of When this function is activated, the headlight instrument lighting Headlights beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve Daytime running lights 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. according to movements of the steering wheel. To unlock the fuel filler door 2. The low beam headlights (daytime running This function can be activated by turning the lights) illuminate automatically, except lighting switch to the Active Bending Light Rear fog light when the light switch (1) is in the parking position (indicated by the arrow in the illustra- light position1. tion). The indicator light in the Active Bending Light symbol will illuminate. The func- NOTE tion can be deactivated by turning the lighting switch counterclockwise to one of the other See page 67 for information on switching between high and low beams. lighting positions.

1 On Canadian models, the daytime running lights will remain on with the light switch in this position.

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Brake lights NOTE The brake lights come on automatically when The rear fog lights are considerably brighter 02 the brakes are applied. than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, Fog lights snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. Front fog lights* (150 meters). The front fog lights can be used in combination with either the headlights or the parking lights. Instrument panel lighting 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. The instrument panel lighting illuminates when 2. Press button (3) to turn on the front fog the ignition is in position II and the light lights. switch (1) is in either position or . G020789 An indicator light in the button illuminates when Headlight pattern with ABL deactivated (left) and the front fog lights are on. NOTE activated (right) Rear fog lights To make it easier to read the odometer, trip NOTE odometer, clock, and ambient temperature, The rear fog lights are located in both taillight these gauges illuminate when the vehicle is • This function can only be activated in clusters. unlocked and when the key has been twilight or dark conditions, and only The rear fogs light will only function in combi- removed from the ignition switch. The light- when the vehicle is in motion. nation with the high/low beam headlights or the ing will go out when the vehicle is locked. • If the indicator light flashes, this indi- optional front fog lights. cates a fault in the ABL system. A text Move the thumb wheel (2) up to increase 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. message will also be displayed. brightness or down to decrease brightness. 2. Press button (5) to turn on the rear fog lights. An indicator light in the button illuminates when the rear fog lights are on.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

Unlocking the fuel filler door With the ignition switched off, press button (4) 02 to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the car begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door re-locks.

66 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

Lever positions Turn signals High/low beam headlights

When turning Continuous high beams 02 Move the lever as far up or down as pos- 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. sible (to position 2) to start the turn signals. 2. With the light switch (1) in position , The turn signals will be cancelled automatically see page 64, pull the turn signal lever by the movement of the steering wheel, or the toward the steering wheel (position 4) to lever can be returned to its initial position by toggle between high and low beams. hand. High beam flash When changing lanes 1. Turn the ignition key to position II. The driver can automatically flash the turn sig- nals 3 times by: 2. Pull the turn signal lever to position 3. The high beams will remain on until the lever is • Moving the turn signal lever up or down to released. G026954 position 1 and releasing it. Turn signals, lane change position • Moving the lever up or down to position 2 Home safe lighting and immediately back to its original posi- When you leave your car at night, you can Turn signals, position for normal turns tion. make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the car. High beam flash NOTE 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Toggle between high and low beams, • This automatic flashing sequence can Home Safe lighting 2. Pull the direction indicator lever as far as be interrupted by immediately moving possible towards the steering wheel (to the lever in the opposite direction. position 4) and release it. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out 3. Exit the car and lock the doors. turn signal bulb. The headlights and parking lights will illuminate and remain on for 301, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be changed according to your

1 Factory setting. 

67 02 Instruments and controls

Left-side steering wheel lever

preferences by using the Personal Settings function, see page 83 for more information. 02

68 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

• --- MPH ACTUAL SPEED (current speed 1. Select one of these functions. in mph, Canadian models only) 2. Press RESET (3). 02 • STC/DSTC-related information, see page 157 --- MILES TO EMPTY TANK This function shows the approximate distance NOTE that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank. The calculation is based on average fuel Warning messages from the car's monitor- consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) ing systems will override the trip computer of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in function. the tank when the reading was taken.

If a warning message is shown in the informa- When the message --- MILES TO EMPTY tion display while you are using the trip com- TANK appears in the display, refuel as soon as possible. G029052 puter: MPG AVERAGE 1. Acknowledge the message by pressing the READ (press to acknowledge/confirm/ This value indicates fuel consumption since the READ (button 1). erase a message) last time the trip computer was reset, by press- Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip 2. Press READ again to return to the trip ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is computer menus) computer function. switched off, information on fuel consumption is stored and remains in system memory until RESET Controls RESET (button 3) is pressed again. The trip computer stores information gathered The trip computer functions can be accessed from several systems in your car and has four MPG INSTANTANEOUS by twisting the thumb wheel (2) one step at a menus (five on Canadian models) that can be This value indicates the current fuel consump- time in either direction. Twisting a final time shown in the information display. tion, based on readings taken once per sec- returns you to the original function. ond. When the car is not moving, "----" will be • --- MILES TO EMPTY TANK displayed. Resetting • --.- MPG AVERAGE (average fuel con- --.- MPG AVERAGE (average fuel consump- MPH AVERAGE SPEED sumption) tion) and --- MPH AVERAGE SPEED can be This value indicates average speed since the • --.- MPG INSTANTANEOUS (current fuel reset. last time the trip computer was reset, by press- consumption) ing RESET (button 3). When the engine is • --- MPH AVERAGE SPEED switched off, information on average speed is 

69 02 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

stored and remains in system memory until the RESET (button 3) is pressed again. 02 MPH ACTUAL SPEED (Canadian models only) This function provides the driver with an instan- taneous conversion of the car's current speed from km/h to mph.

NOTE Trip computer readings may vary slightly depending on the circumference of the tires on the car, tire inflation, or driving style.

70 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

Engaging the cruise control function Increasing or decreasing speed NOTE • Cruise control will not function at 02 speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). • Momentary acceleration, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect cruise control oper- ation. The car will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Temporarily disengaging the cruise control

G020141 G031667 • Press 0 to temporarily disengage cruise control. The cruise control buttons are located on the Use + or – in the following ways to increase or CRUISEwill appear in the function display. The left side of the steering wheel hub. decrease the vehicle's speed: currently set speed is stored in the system's memory. 1. Press and hold down + or – until the vehicle NOTE reaches the desired speed. This will This does not set the vehicle's speed. become the set speed when the button is Cruise control is also automatically released. disengaged: If the speed drops below approximately 1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE will 2. Press + or – for approximately a half sec- • 20 mph (30 km/h) when driving uphill. appear in the function display in the center ond and release the button to increase or of the instrument panel. decrease vehicle speed by approximately • When the brake or clutch pedal is 1 mph (1.6 km/h). depressed. 2. Press + or – to set the current speed. If the gear selector is moved to posi- CRUISE-ONwill be displayed. • tion N.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. If the vehicle's speed is increased by using 02 • the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute.

Returning to the set speed Press the button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE- ONwill be displayed.

Disengaging cruise control Cruise control can also be disengaged by: • Pressing the CRUISEbutton (CRUISE- ONwill no longer be shown in the function display). • Putting the gear selector in Neutral (N).

WARNING Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades.

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

Windshield wipers Manual wiper function CAUTION From position 0, move the lever upward. The windshield wipers will • Use ample washer fluid when washing 02 sweep one stroke at a time for as the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are B C long as the lever is held up. in operation. 0 • Before using the wipers, ice and snow A Intermittent wiper function 0 With the lever in this position, you should be removed from the wind- shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper can set the wiper interval by mov- blades are not frozen in place. ing the thumb wheel (C) upward to increase wiper speed or down- ward to decrease the speed. Headlight washers (certain models) Continuous wiper function When the lever has been pulled, high pressure jets mounted in the bumper will spray the head- G025419 The wipers operate at "normal" speed. lights. Windshield/headlight washers High speed wiper function. The following applies to conserve washer fluid, Rain sensor – on/of, see page 73 see page 64 for information on the light switch positions: Thumb wheel – Windshield washers Low/high beam headlights on Windshield wipers off Pull the lever toward the steering wheel and The headlights will be washed the first time the The windshield wipers are off when release it. The wipers will make 2–3 sweeps windshield is washed. Thereafter, the head- the lever is in position 0. across the windshield after the lever has been lights will only be washed once for every five released. times the windshield is washed within a 10 minute period.

Parking lights on The optional Active Bending Lights will be washed once for every five times the wind- shield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed. 

73 02 Instruments and controls

Right-side steering wheel lever

– Rain sensor* 3. Press button B (see page 73). The rain sen- – Thumb wheel sor symbol will appear in the lower display. The thumb wheel is used to set the wiper inter- 02 Manual deactivation val when intermittent wiping is selected, or the sensitivity to the amount of rain on the wind- The rain sensor can be deactivated by: shield when the rain sensor is selected. Move Pressing button (B). the wheel upward or downward to increase/ or decrease wiper speed when the intermittent function is selected, or to increase/decrease Moving the windshield wiper lever down. the optional rain sensor's sensitivity when the this function is activated. NOTE The rain sensor function will remain acti- vated if the lever is briefly moved up to acti- vate the "manual sweep" function. G031469

The rain sensor regulates windshield wiper CAUTION speed according to the amount of water on the The rain sensor should be deactivated when windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor is washing the car in an automatic car wash, adjusted by moving the thumb wheel (C in the etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the illustration on the previous page) up (the wipers wipers will start inadvertently in the car will sweep the windshield more frequently) or wash and could be damaged. down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently). Automatic deactivation The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in On/Off the following situations: Activating the rain sensor • When the key is removed from the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition. • Five minutes after the ignition is switched 2. Put the windshield wiper lever in posi- off if the key is left in the ignition. tion 0.

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, Hazard warning flashers

Steering wheel adjustment Check that the steering wheel is locked in the 2. Press the button again to turn off the flash- new position. ers. 02 WARNING NOTE Never adjust the steering wheel while driv- • Regulations regarding the use of the ing. hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be acti- Hazard warning flashers vated automatically if an airbag deploys. G027308

Both the height and the reach of the steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable posi- tion for the driver. 1. Pull down the lever on the steering column to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable G020144 position. 3. Press the lever back into place to lock the The four-way flasher should be used to indi- steering wheel in the new position. If nec- cate that the vehicle has become a traffic haz- essary, press the steering wheel slightly ard. while pressing the lever into the locked 1. Press the triangular button in the center position. dash.

75 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Operation Opening a window to close a window to the position of your Lightly press down the front edge of any of the choice. 02 buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop") to 2. Pull the front part of any of the buttons (A open a window to the position of your choice. or B) up as far as possible and release to automatically close the window com- WARNING pletely. To stop the window at any time, • Always remove the ignition key when press the button down. the vehicle is unattended. • Never leave children unattended in the Lockout switch for rear windows vehicle. • Make sure that the windows are com- pletely unobstructed before they are operated.

Control panel in driver's door 1. Press the front part of any of the buttons (A or B) as far down as possible and release Open/close front windows to automatically open the window com- Open/close rear windows pletely. The power windows are controlled by buttons 2. To stop the window at any time, pull the in the arm rests. button up. • The ignition must be ON (ignition key in position I, II or the engine running) for the NOTE power windows to function. To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear Lockout switch • The power windows will also function after windows are opened, also open the front windows slightly. The electrically operated rear door windows the ignition has been switched off as long can be disabled by a switch located on the as neither of the front doors has been driver's door (see illustration). opened. Closing a window 1. Lightly pull up the front edge of any of the If the light in the switch is OFF: The rear door buttons (A or B) to the first detent ("stop") windows can be raised or lowered with the

76 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows buttons on the rear door armrests or with the Power window controls – rear doors buttons on the driver's door armrest. 02 If the light in the switch is ON: The rear door windows can only be raised or lowered with the buttons on the driver's door.

Power window control – front passenger's side

The rear door windows can be operated with the control on each door and with the switch on the driver's door.

The control for the power window in the front passenger's door operates that window only.

77 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Rearview mirror Rearview mirror with compass* Calibrating the compass

02 G031045 G029930

Day/night control The upper right-hand corner of the rearview The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is initially set for the zone to Normal position mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction toward which the car is which the car was delivered, and should Night position, reduces glare from follow- pointing. Eight different directions can be dis- always be adjusted if the car is driven to a new ing traffic played: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The magnetic zone. A "C" will be displayed if cali- display shows your car's orientation with bration becomes necessary. Night position respect to true north. To calibrate the compass: To reduce glare from the headlights of follow- ing vehicles, use control (1) to switch between 1. Stop the car in a large, open area, away the normal and night-driving positions. from traffic.

Auto-dim function* 2. Using a pen or similar object, hold the but- An optional integrated sensor reacts to head- ton (1) depressed for at least 6 sec- lights from following traffic and automatically onds. "C" will be displayed. reduces glare.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Power door mirrors Use this control to adjust the driver's door mirror. 02 Passenger's door mirror: 1. Press the R switch (a light in the switch will go on) to activate the adjustment control. Use this control to adjust the passenger's door mirror. 2. After you have adjusted the mirror(s), press the L or R switch again (the LED will go out) to deactivate the adjustment control.

Storing the mirrors' position

G026409 The position of the door mirrors is stored when the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's Magnetic zones door is unlocked with the same remote key and 3. Press button (1) for at least 3 seconds to The mirror control switches are located on the that door is opened within 2 minutes, the driver's door armrest. display the number of the current magnetic optional power driver's seat and side door mir- zone. rors will automatically move to the position that 4. Press button (1) repeatedly until the num- Adjusting the mirrors they were in when the doors were most ber for the required geographical area (1– recently locked with the same remote key. WARNING 15) is displayed. "C" will be displayed Folding power door mirrors* again. • The mirrors should always be adjusted The mirrors can be folded in for parking/driving 5. Drive slowly in a circle at a maximum speed prior to driving. in narrow spaces. of 6 mph (10 km/h) until a compass direc- • Objects seen in the passenger's side Folding the mirrors in tion is displayed. wide-angle door mirror are closer than they appear to be. 1. Press down the L and R mirror control but- Calibration is complete. tons on the driver's door at the same time.

Driver's door mirror: 2. Release them after approximately one sec- Press the L button (a light in the switch will ond. The mirrors automatically fold in to the go on) to activate the adjustment control. fully retracted position. 

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 02 Instruments and controls

Mirrors

Folding the mirrors out 1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L R mirror control buttons on the driver's 02 and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors door at the same time. automatically fold out to the fully extended 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and position. R mirror control buttons. Automatic folding This returns the mirrors to their original (neutral) When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the positions. remote key or with the optional keyless drive system (see page 123), the power door mirrors Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)* with automatically fold in or out. The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence NOTE of another vehicle in the side-view mirror's The door mirrors will not fold out automati- "blind area." See page 166 for detailed infor- cally when the vehicle is unlocked if they mation. were folded in using the buttons on the driv- er's door control panel.

This function can be activated/deactivated in Personal settings (see page 83). In the menu system, go to Car settings… Mirror fold on locking. Return to "neutral" position If a mirror has been inadvertently moved (bum- ped in a parking lot, etc.) from its original (neu- tral) position, it must be moved back to this position before automatic folding will function again. To do so:

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Power moonroof*

Operating the moonroof Sliding moonroof

Auto open/close 02 Open: Pull the switch as far back as possible (to position 1) and release it to automatically slide open the moonroof. Close: Push the switch as far forward as pos- sible (to position 4) and release it to automati- cally close the moonroof. Manual open/close Open: Pull the switch back to the first stop (position 2) and hold it until the moonroof has opened to the position of your choice. G029222 Close: Push the switch forward to the first stop G007503 Moonroof control in the ceiling console (position 3) and hold it until the moonroof has Auto open closed to the position of your choice, or has To operate the moonroof, the ignition key must closed completely. first be turned to the intermediate or drive posi- Manual open tion (position I, II or the engine running). The moonroof can be opened in two ways: Manual close NOTE Tilt position Auto close If the moonroof is repeatedly obstructed during auto-close operation, an overload Sliding moonroof Tilt open circuit breaker will temporarily halt moon- roof function. The moonroof will return to Tilt close normal function after a brief cool-down period. Tilt position Open: Press the rear edge of the control upward to position 5. Close: Pull the rear edge of the control down to position 6.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 02 Instruments and controls

Power moonroof*

CAUTION Visor 02 • Remove ice and snow before opening the moonroof. • Do not operate the moonroof if it is fro- zen closed. • Never place heavy objects on the moonroof.

WARNING • If the moonroof is obstructed during auto-close operation, it will automati- cally reverse direction and return to its

starting position. G020157 • During manual closing, if the moonroof is obstructed, immediately open it The optional moonroof features a sliding visor. again. The visor slides open automatically when the moonroof is opened, and must be closed man- ually. WARNING • Never open or close the moonroof if it is obstructed in any way. • Never allow a child to operate the moonroof. • Never extend any object or body part though the open moonroof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

Control panel Personal settings can be made for some of the 2. Select hour(s) or minute(s) to be changed car's functions, such as the central locking with the left/right arrow keys. system, climate control, and the audio system. 02 3. Press ENTER to start the clock. Please refer to page 241 for more information on the audio functions that can be adjusted. The settings are presented in the display (A). NOTE A If you are currently using the 12-hour time To access the menu and adjust settings setting, use the up/down arrow keys to 1. Press MENU (B). select AM/PM after the minute-setting has been adjusted. 2. Scroll to Car settings… using the menu navigation control (E). Lock confirmation light 3. Press ENTER (D). When the car is locked/unlocked with the E B 4. Select an alternative using the menu navi- remote key, the direction indicators can be D C gation control (E). selected to flash to confirm the action. The alternatives On/Off are available for both lock- 5. Confirm your selection by pressing ing and unlocking. ENTER. Autolock To exit the menu When the car starts to move, the doors and Press EXIT (C). trunk can be locked automatically. The alter- G026307 natives On/Off are available. Available settings Display NOTE Clock adjust Menu button To set the time: Pulling the handle twice on a door unlocks and opens that door. Exit button 1. Use the number keys or the up/down arrow Enter button keys on the navigation control (E) to change the hour or minute. Unlock Menu navigation controls There are two alternatives for unlocking:



83 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

• Global (All doors) – unlocks all doors and Temporarily turning off the alarm Information the trunk with one press on the remote key. sensor(s) • VIN number – The VIN (Vehicle Identifica- 02 • Two Step (Two-stage unlocking) – This The alarm sensors can be temporarily turned tion Number) is the car's unique identity alternative unlocks the driver's door with off (if, for example, a person or a pet remains number. one press on the remote key. A second in the vehicle when the doors are locked from • Number of Keys – the number of keys reg- press unlocks the passenger's door and outside with the remote key). There are two istered for the car is displayed here. the trunk alternatives:Activate once and Ask on exit, see page 118 and 130. Climate functions Automatically folding the door mirrors • Blower speed in AUTO mode – the blower The setting makes it possible to automatically Approach lighting speed can be set to AUTO mode in models fold the door mirrors in or out when the vehicle This alternative determines the length of time equipped with ECC. Choose between is locked or unlocked. See page 79. for which the car's lights will remain on when "Low", "Normal" and "High". the Approach light button on the central lock- Timer for recirculation – when the timer is Operating side windows • ing system's remote key is pressed. Intervals active, the air recirculates in the car for The following alternative can be selected for of 30/60/90 seconds may be selected, see the 3–12 minutes depending on the ambient opening all side windows at the same time by section "Remote key functions" for more infor- temperature. Select On/Off depending on pressing and holding the Unlock switch in mation. whether the recirculation timer is to be either of the front doors (see page 127 for active or not. additional information)1 Home safe lighting This alternative determines the length of time Keyless locking and unlocking* NOTE for which the car's lights will remain on when The following alternatives can be selected for the high beam lever on the steering column is locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: The ignition key must be in position I or higher (see page 143) before all side win- pulled toward the wheel with the ignition • All doors – all doors are locked or unlocked dows can be opened using the switches in switched off. Intervals of 30/60/90 seconds at the same time. may be selected, see page 67 for information the front doors. Doors on the same side – front and rear on using this function. • doors on the same side are unlocked • Auto open all windows On/Off together.

1 This menu alternative also makes it possible to open all side windows by pressing and holding the Unlock button on the remote key for several seconds.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Personal settings

• Both front doors – both front doors are unlocked together. 02 • One front door – either of the front doors can be unlocked separately2. Reset to factory settings Use this alternative to return to the default cli- mate system settings.

2 Factory default.

85 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Introduction WARNING Programming HomeLink

02 • If you use HomeLink to open a garage NOTE door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. Some vehicles may require the ignition When programming a garage door switch to be turned on or to the second • (“accessories”) position for programming opener, it is advised to park outside of and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also rec- the garage. ommended that a new battery be placed in • Do not use HomeLink with any garage the hand-held transmitter of the device door opener that lacks safety stop and being programmed to HomeLink for quicker reverse features as required by U.S. training and accurate transmission of the federal safety standards (this includes radio-frequency signal. any garage door opener model manu- factured before April 1, 1982). A garage 1. Position the end of your hand-held trans- door that cannot detect an object - sig- G030070 mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the naling the door to stop and reverse - HomeLink button you wish to program does not meet current U.S. federal The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System pro- while keeping the indicator light in view. safety standards. For more information, vides a convenient way to replace up to three contact HomeLink at: 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters www.homelink.com. chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmit- used to activate devices such as gate opera- ter buttons until the HomeLink indicator tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, light changes from a slow to a rapidly blink- Retain the original transmitter of the RF device security systems, even home lighting. Addi- ing light. Now you may release both the you are programming for use in other vehicles tional HomeLink information can be found on HomeLink and hand-held transmitter but- as well as for future HomeLink programming. It the Internet at www.homelink.com. tons. is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”.

1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

NOTE found where the hanging antenna wire is cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” attached to the motor-head unit. step 2 with the following: Some devices may require you to replace 02 this Programming Step 2 with procedures 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Pro- “smart” button. (The name and color of the button while you press and release - gramming” section. If the HomeLink indica- button may vary by manufacturer.) There every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- tor light does not change to a rapidly blink- are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. held transmitter until the HomeLink indica- ing light after performing these steps, con- tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly tact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold blinking light. Now you may release both for two seconds and release the pro- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and buttons. “press/hold/release” sequence a second release the programmed HomeLink but- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- time, and, depending on the brand of the ton up to two separate times to activate the plete. garage door opener (or other rolling code door. If the door does not activate, press equipped device), repeat this sequence a and hold the just-trained HomeLink button third time to complete the programming Using HomeLink and observe the indicator light. process. To operate, simply press and release the pro- • If the indicator light stays on con- HomeLink should now activate your rolling grammed HomeLink button. Activation will stantly, programming is complete code equipped device. now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage and your device should activate when door opener, gate operator, security system, the HomeLink button is pressed and Gate Operator/Canadian Programming entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For released. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- device may also be used at any time. In the two seconds and then turns to a con- eral seconds of transmission – which may not event that there are still programming difficul- stant light continue with “Program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the ties or questions, contact HomeLink at: ming” steps 4-6 to complete the pro- signal during programming. Similar to this www.homelink.com. gramming of a rolling code equipped Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are device (most commonly a garage door designed to “time-out” in the same manner. opener). If you live in Canada or you are having difficul- 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motor- ties programming a gate operator or garage head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” door opener by using the “Programming” pro- or “smart” button. This can usually be



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*

Erasing HomeLink Buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink To erase programming from the three Home- at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. 02 Link buttons (individual buttons cannot be This device complies with FCC rules part 15 erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation below), follow the step noted: is subject to the following two conditions: (1) 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink This device may not cause harmful interfer- buttons until the indicator light begins to ence, and (2) This device must accept any flash-after 10 seconds. interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired opera- 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for tion. longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode NOTE and can be programmed at any time beginning The transmitter has been tested and com- with “Programming” - step 1. plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Reprogramming a Single HomeLink the party responsible for compliance could Button void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but- ton. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- Link button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1.

2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

02

89 90 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. i itiuin...... 101 Air distribution...... 98 Electronic ClimateControl(ECC)*...... 95 Manual climatecontrol...... 94 Air vents...... 92 General information......

G020906 CLIMATE 03 03 Climate

General information

Air conditioning – A/C Fog on the inside of the windows Passenger compartment filter Your car is equipped with a climate control The defroster function should be used to Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at system that includes either manually adjusta- remove fog or mist from the inside of the win- the recommended intervals. Please refer to ble air conditioning or optional Electronic Cli- dows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- your Warranty and Service Records Informa- mate Control (ECC). mercially available window washing spray will tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified also help prevent fogging or misting Volvo service technician for these intervals. The air conditioning system can be switched 03 The filter should be replaced more often when off, but for optimal air quality in the passenger driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The compartment and to prevent the windows from Climate control maintenance filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should fogging, the air conditioning should be left on Special tools and equipment are required to always be replaced with a new one. – even in cool weather. maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done NOTE NOTE by a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- nician. There are different types of cabin air filters. In warm weather, a small amount of water Ensure that the correct type is installed. may accumulate under the car when it has been parked. This water is condensation Refrigerant from the A/C system and is normal. Volvo cares about the environment. The air Display conditioning system in your car contains a The display above the climate control panel Ice and snow CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance shows the climate settings that have been will not deplete the ozone layer. The system Always keep the air intake grille at the base of made. contains 1.2 lbs (530 g) R134a (HFC 134a), and the windshield free of snow. uses PAG oil. Personal settings There are two functions in the climate system that can be set to your preferences: • Blower speed to Auto mode (models with ECC only). • Timer controlled recirculation of the air in the passenger compartment.

92 03 Climate

General information

For information about how to make these set- closed. If you drive with the windows or moon- tings, see the Personal settings section on roof open, it may be preferable to manually page 83. adjust the temperature and blower control (the LED in the AUTO switch should be off). Models equipped with ECC* Acceleration The air conditioning system is temporarily Sensors 03 • The sunlight sensor is on the upper side of switched off during full throttle acceleration. the dashboard • The passenger compartment temperature sensor is located behind the climate sys- tem control panel. • The ambient temperature sensor is in the driver's side door mirror. • The humidity sensor is in the rearview mir- ror. These sensors should never be obstructed.

NOTE The sunlight sensor monitors the side of the vehicle from which the sun shines into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature may differ slightly between the left and right air vents, even if the climate system temperature is set to be the same for both sides of the passenger compart- ment.

Side windows and optional moonroof The electronic climate control system will func- tion best if the windows and moonroof are

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Climate

Air vents

Air vents in the dashboard

03 G019942

Open Closed Horizontal air flow Vertical air flow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- dows to defrost.

94 03 Climate

Manual climate control

03 G019515

Climate system control panel Blower speed Manual climate system functions 2. Recirculation This function can be used to Recirculation 1. Blower shut out exhaust fumes, The blower speed can be Defroster smoke, etc from the passen- increased or decreased by ger compartment. The air in Airflow controls turning the knob. If the knob is the passenger compartment turned counterclockwise and A/C – ON/OFF is then recirculated, i.e. no air the indicator light in the dis- from outside the car is taken Heated driver's seat play goes out, the blower and into the car when this function is activated. the air conditioning are Recirculation (together with the air condition- Heated front passenger's seat switched off. The display shows the blower ing system) cools the passenger compartment symbol and OFF Rear window and door mirror defrosters more quickly in very warm weather. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk Temperature selector of condensation forming on the insides of the windows, especially in winter.



95 03 Climate

Manual climate control

Timer 4. Airflow controls Press the button once – both LEDs light up. The timer function minimizes the risk of mist- Press one of the three buttons Reduced heating: ing, or stale air when the recirculation function in the illustration to activate is selected, see page 83 for information on set- the selected airflow. A symbol Press the button a second time – one LED ting the recirculation timer. Recirculation is in the display above the cli- lights up. always disengaged when you select mate control panel and a lit Seat heating off: Defroster (3). LED in the selected button 03 indicate that the manual func- Press the button a third time – no LEDs are 3. Defroster tion has been selected. With manually selected lit. Directs airflow to the wind- airflow both warm and cool air can be selected. 8. Heated rear window and door mirrors shield and side windows and The desired temperature is selected using con- Press to defrost the rear win- increases blower speed. trol 9. dow and door mirrors. 5. A/C – On or Off The rear window and door ON: The air conditioning sys- mirrors are defrosted simulta- tem is engaged when the ON neously if the switch is When the defroster is activated: light is lit. pressed once. The defrost Air flows to the windows at high blower • OFF: The system is disen- function is active if the LED in the switch is illu- speed. gaged when the OFF lights minated. • The LED in the defroster button lights up up. • The function can be switched off manually when this function is activated. The air con- by pressing the button, ditioning system is controlled to provide If Defroster (3) is activated the air conditioning maximum air dehumidification. is always engaged. • The defrost function switches off automat- ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on • The air conditioning is automatically 6/7. Heated front seats* the outside temperature. switched on (can be switched off by press- Maximum heating: ing button 5). NOTE On certain markets, the defrost function may remain on longer than 20 minutes in cold weather to help keep the rear window free from ice or condensation.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate

Manual climate control

9. Temperature selector The knob with the thermome- ter symbol is used to select cooling or heating for both the driver's and passenger's sides of the car. 03

97 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*

03 G019518

Auto – On/Off ECC functions 2. Blower speed The blower speed can be Blower speed 1. Auto – On/Off increased or decreased by Recirculation The AUTO function automat- turning the knob. The blower ically regulates climate con- speed is regulated automati- Defroster trol to maintain the desired cally if AUTO is selected. The temperature. The automatic Airflow controls previously set blower speed is function controls heating, air disconnected. A/C – ON/OFF conditioning, blower speed, recirculation, and air distribu- NOTE Heated driver's seat tion. If the knob is turned counterclockwise and Heated front passenger's seat If you select one or more manual functions, the the blower indication in the display goes remaining functions continue to be controlled out, the blower and the air conditioning are Rear window and door mirror defrosters automatically. All manual settings are switched switched off. The display shows the blower Temperature selector off when AUTO is switched on. AUTO symbol and OFF. CLIMATE is shown in the display.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*

3. Recirculation 4. Defroster 6. Air conditioning On/Off This function can be used to Directs airflow to the wind- ON: The air conditioning sys- shut out exhaust fumes, shield and side windows and tem is engaged when the ON smoke, etc from the passen- increases blower speed. light is lit and is controlled ger compartment. The air in When the defroster is acti- automatically by the system the passenger compartment vated: to maintain the selected tem- is then recirculated, i.e. no air perature. 03 from outside the car is taken Air flows to the windows at high blower into the car when this function is activated. • OFF: The system is disengaged when the speed. OFF lights up If the air in the car recirculates for too long, • The LED in the defroster button lights up When OFF is selected and the OFF LED is lit, there is a risk of condensation forming on the when this function is activated. The air con- insides of the windows, especially in winter. the air conditioning system is deactivated. ditioning system is controlled to provide Other functions are still controlled automati- maximum air dehumidification. Timer cally. • The air conditioning is automatically The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging When Defroster (4) is selected, the air condi- or stale air when the recirculation function is switched on (can be switched off by press- ing button 6). tioning system is activated for maximum dehu- selected, see page 83 for information on set- midifying. ting the recirculation timer. The air is not recirculated. 7 and 8. Heated front seats* 5. Airflow controls NOTE Press one of the three buttons Recirculation is always disengaged if the in the illustration to activate defroster button is engaged to clear ice or the selected airflow. A symbol condensation from the side windows. in the display above the cli- mate control panel and a lit LED in the selected button indicate that the manual func- Maximum heating: tion has been selected. With manually selected Press the button once – both LEDs light up. airflow both warm and cool air can be selected. See also the table on page 99. Reduced heating:



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Climate

Electronic Climate Control (ECC)*

Press the button a second time – one LED NOTE NOTE lights up. • On certain markets, the defrost function Selecting a temperature that is higher or Seat heating off: may remain on longer than 20 minutes lower than necessary will not heat or cool Press the button a third time – no LEDs are in cold weather to help keep the rear the passenger compartment faster. lit. window free from ice or condensation. 03 9. Rear window and door mirror 10. Temperature selector defrosters The temperatures on the driv- er's and passenger's sides can be set separately using the knob (with the thermome- ter in it). The temperature can be set for both sides of the car when the ignition is switched Press to defrost the rear window and door on (both LEDs will be on), which means that a mirrors. temperature setting will apply to both sides of the car. The rear window and door mirrors are defros- ted simultaneously if the switch is pressed To set the temperature on one side of the car: once. The defrost function is active if the LED 1. Press the knob once. The LED for one side in the switch is illuminated. of the car will light up. Turn the knob to • The function can be switched off manually adjust the temperature. by pressing the button. 2. Press the knob a second time to set the • The defrost function switches off automat- temperature on the opposite side of the ically after 12–20 minutes, depending on car. the outside temperature. 3. Press the knob a third time to set the tem- perature on both sides of the car at the same time.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate

Air distribution

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use: Defroster. Defrost/de-fog the wind- Air to the floor and win- For comfortable condi- shield and front side win- dows. tions and good defrosting Air is not recirculated in dows. in cold weather. this mode. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the Medium to high blower Air conditioning is always dashboard air vents. speed. 03 engaged. There is also a certain amount of airflow to the panel air vents.

Air to windshield and front Prevents fogging in cold Air to the floor and from For sunny weather with side windows. or humid weather (blower the dashboard air vents. cool ambient tempera- speed should be moder- tures. There is also a certain ate to high). amount of airflow to the dashboard air vents.

Air to the windows and For good comfort in Air to the floor. To warm the feet. from the dashboard air warm, dry weather. There is a certain amount vents. of airflow to the dash- board and window air vents.

Airflow directed to the To ensure efficient cooling Airflow to the windows, For cooler air toward the head and chest from the in a warm weather. dashboard air vents, and feet, or for warmer air dashboard air vents. floor. toward the head and chest.

101 102 rn ...... 115 Trunk ...... 113 Rear seat...... Storage compartments Interior lighting Front seats ...... 104 ...... 108 ...... 110 ......

G020908 INTERIOR 04 04 Interior

Front seats

Manual seat adjustment Turn this knob to adjust the backrest tilt. Power seats* Control panel for the optional power seats. The power driver's seat can be adjusted: • If the ignition key is in position I or II. NOTE • During a 10 minute period after the doors have been unlocked if the door remains Both front seats are equipped with head open. restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper • If the door is closed and the ignition key is edge of the head restraint should be at least not yet in the ignition, or if the key is in on a level with the upper-most point of the position 0, the seat can be adjusted or dur- seat occupant's ear (see the section ing a period of 40 seconds. The power 04 "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on passenger's seat can only be adjusted if page 106). the ignition key is in position I or II, or if the engine is running. WARNING Do not adjust the seat while driving. The driver's and passenger's seats can be • adjusted in a number of ways to provide a • Adjust the driver’s seat and seat belt comfortable driving and sitting position. (see page 20) before driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake Forward-rearward: Pull the lever up and pedal can be depressed fully. slide the seat to the position of your choice. • Position the seat as far rearward as Use this control to raise or lower the front comfort and control allow. edge of the seat cushion. Use this control to raise or lower the rear edge of the seat cushion. Turn this knob (optional on some passeng- er's seats) to adjust the firmness of the lumbar support1.

1 Also applies to the optional power seat.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Front seats

Adjusting the seat NOTE Programming the seat memory, driver's seat only* Both front seats are equipped with head restraints that can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear (see the section "Adjusting the front seat head restraints" on page 106).

NOTE 04 The power seats have an overload protector that activates if a seat is blocked by any

G020199 object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition (key in position 0) and wait for approxi- Seat adjustment controls mately 20 seconds before operating the G020200 seat again. Seat adjustment controls 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the Power seat memory buttons side of the seat can be used to move the seat Three different seating positions can be stored to the position of your choice. Emergency stop in the seat's memory. The memory buttons are If the seat inadvertently begins to move, press Move this section of the control up or down located on the outboard side of the driver's any of the buttons to stop the seat. to raise/lower the front section of the seat seat (see the illustration above). The following cushion. example explains how memory button 1 can be programmed. Buttons 2 and 3 can be pro- Move the control forward/rearward to grammed in the same way. move the seat forward or rearward. To program (store) a seat position in memory Move this section of the control up or down button 1: to raise/lower the rear section of the seat cushion. Backrest tilt.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 04 Interior

Front seats

1. Adjust the seat to the desired position. the doors were most recently locked with Adjusting the front seat head restraints 2. Press and hold down the "M" (Memory) the same remote key. button. NOTE 3. With the "M" button depressed, press memory button 1 to store the seat's current The memory function in the remote key position. operates independently the memory func- tion in the seat. To move the seat to the position that it was in when memory button 1 was programmed, press and hold down button 1 until the seat WARNING stops moving. 04 • Because the driver's seat can be As a safety precaution, the seat will stop auto- adjusted with the ignition off, children matically if the button is released before the should never be left unattended in the seat has reached the preset position. car. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED Central locking system remote key and at any time by pressing any button on driver's seat memory the power seat control panel. The front seat head restraints are designed so The remote key transmitter can also be equip- that they can be adjusted to two different Do not adjust the seat while driving. The ped with an optional function that controls the • height positions. seat should be adjusted so that the electrically operated driver's seat in the follow- brake pedal can be depressed fully. In ing way: addition, position the seat as far rear- NOTE 1. Adjust the seat to the desired position. ward as comfort and control allow. • When the vehicle leaves the factory, the 2. When you leave the car, lock it using the • The seat rails on the floor must not be front seat head restraints will be in the remote key. obstructed in any way when the seat is lower position. in motion. • It is advisable to have the front seat 3. The next time the driver's door is unlocked head restraints in the lower position if with the same remote key and that door is you wish to fold down the seat's back- opened within 2 minutes, the driver's seat rest. and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when

106 04 Interior

Front seats

The head restraints should be put in the upper WARNING WARNING or lower position according to the height of the occupant of the seat. After adjusting the head restraint, be sure • If a front seat head restraint has been that it is securely locked in the new position removed, it must be put properly back by pressing and/or pulling it. in place and it must lock (click) into one of the available adjustment positions Removing a head restraint before the seat is occupied. The front seat head restraints can be removed, • The front seat head restraints must be for example, when cleaning the upholstery or if in position and properly adjusted to the the front passenger's seat backrest is folded height of the person sitting in the seat down to accommodate a long load. To do so: when the vehicle is driven and when the front passenger's seat is occupied. 04 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the release button underneath its left side, at the base of the support. 2. While holding in the release button, press the locking button at the base of the head restraint's right support with a screw driver, etc., and lift the head restraint until The upper edge of the head restraint should be it can be removed completely. at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear (see illustration). To raise or lower a head restraint:

Raising or lowering a head restraint 1. Release the head restraint by pressing the button underneath its left side, at the base of the support (see the illustration). 2. Move the head restraint until it clicks (locks) into the upper or lower position.

107 04 Interior

Interior lighting

Interior lighting Neutral position: the interior courtesy light- 5 minutes after the engine has been switched ing comes on when a door is opened, and off. is switched off 10 seconds after the door is closed. Footwell lighting The footwell (and courtesy lighting) comes on Press the right side of the button: the inte- or goes off when one of the side doors is rior courtesy lighting stays off. opened or closed.

Courtesy lighting – automatic function Rear reading lights The interior lighting has a built-in automatic function that switches on the courtesy lighting 04 for 30 seconds when: • the car is unlocked from the outside using the key blade or remote key G020201 • the engine is switched off and the ignition Front courtesy lights and reading lights key is turned to the 0 position. Front driver's side reading light, on/off The courtesy lighting lights up or remains on for 5 minutes when: Courtesy lighting • one of the doors is opened and left open. Front passenger's side reading light, on/off • the courtesy lighting has not been The front and rear reading lights can be acti- switched off (the right side of button 2 vated when the ignition key is position I or II, or depressed). G020763 when the engine is running. The front reading The automatic lighting goes out when: Rear reading lights (in ceiling) lights are switched on and off by pressing but- the engine is started Rear driver's side reading light, on/off tons (1) or (3). • • the car is locked from the outside using the Rear passenger's side reading light, on/off The courtesy lighting (2) can be set to three key blade or remote key. positions: The rear reading lights can be switched on or If the courtesy lighting is not switched off man- off by pressing the respective buttons, and Press the left side of the button: the interior ually, it will be turned off automatically courtesy lighting turns on.

108 04 Interior

Interior lighting function if the ignition key is in positions I, II, or if the engine is running. The courtesy lighting can be switched on or off within 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off, or after a door has been opened or closed. These lights switch off automatically 5 minutes after the engine has been switched off.

Vanity mirror 04 G020210

Raise the cover to switch on the light.

109 04 Interior

Storage compartments

04

110 04 Interior

Storage compartments

Storage pocket (on the rear side of the front Glove compartment Storage under the front, center armrest seats) Compartment in door panel Storage pocket (on the front side of the front seat cushion) Glove compartment Storage compartment for e.g., CDs and cup holders Rear seat storage compartment and cup 04 holders Storage pocket (on the front side of the rear, center seat cushion). G024208 G018371 WARNING The owners manual and maps can be stored There are two storage compartments under the • Anchor any heavy objects to prevent here. There are also holders for coins, pens and front, center armrest. them from moving during sudden stops. fuel cards. The glove compartment can only be • Press the smaller button on the front edge • Packages on the rear parcel shelf can locked and unlocked using the detachable key of the armrest and lift the armrest cover to obscure vision and may become dan- blade from the central locking system's remote access a shallow storage compartment. gerous projectiles in the event of a sud- key. See page 120 for information on removing den stop or an accident. the key blade from the remote key, and page • Press the larger button and lift the entire armrest to access a deeper compartment. 128 for information about locking the glove compartment.



111 04 Interior

Storage compartments

CD storage Cup holders in the center console Storage compartment behind the gear lever

04 G026704 G018372 G019623 The deep storage compartment has room for Two cup holders are located under the sliding 10 CD jewel cases. These cases must be cover in the center console. If the buttons for optional equipment are not inserted with their spines upward in order to The cup holders can be lifted out if necessary. installed, the recess behind the gear lever can allow space for 10 cases in the storage com- be used as a storage compartment for coins, partment To do so, grasp the indentation on the rear edge of the cup holder and lift. etc. To put the cup holder back in place: 1. Slide the two locating tabs in the front side of the cup holder into the two correspond- ing recesses in the center console storage space. 2. Press down the rear edge of the cup holder. To close the sliding cover, grasp the underside of the front edge and pull.

112 04 Interior

Rear seat

Rear seat head restraints Each of the rear seating positions is equipped WARNING with a head restraint that can be adjusted ver- tically to suit the height of the passenger. The If a head restraint has been removed, it must upper edge of the head restraint should be at be put properly back in place and it must lock (click) into one of the available adjust- least on a level with the upper-most point of the ment positions before the seat is occupied. seat occupant's ear (see illustration).

WARNING Folding down the rear seat backrests The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position 04 is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the head restraint

G020765 should be at least on a level with the upper- most point of the seat occupant's ear. Adjust the head restraint vertically To raise: Slide the head restraint up to the desired height. To lower: Press the catch at the base of the right support and press the head restraint down. G020790 To remove: Pull the head restraint up far as Both sections of the rear seat backrest can be possible. Press the catch at the base of the folded down, together or separately, to enable right support and pull the head restraint out you to transport long objects. Before folding of the its holders. down the rear seat backrests, the outboard seat belts can be attached to the clothes hook as shown in the illustration.



113 04 Interior

Rear seat

NOTE 1. Grasp the rear edge of the seat cushion WARNING and pull it forward. When the seat backs are folded down, the • The red lock indicator is VISIBLE when head restraints may be damaged if they are 2. Pull the catch on the upper outboard edge the backrest is NOT locked in position not removed. The center head restraint of the backrest upward and forward to and hidden when the backrest is cor- must also be removed when transporting release the backrest lock. A red lock indi- rectly locked in place. When the back- heavy loads. cator is visible when the backrest is not rest is in the upright position, it must locked in the upright position. always be correctly locked in place. 3. Fold the backrest down partially and • When the rear seat is folded down, do remove the outboard head restraints. not place heavy objects against the Press the center head restraint down com- backs of the front seats. This places a 04 pletely or remove it. severe strain on the folded down back- 4. Place the head restraints in the plastic rest of the rear seat. Be sure to secure tubes, which are now accessible on the cargo. under side of the seat cushions. • Cargo must not be stacked higher than the top of seat backs. This will reduce WARNING the possibility of luggage, etc. becom- ing projectiles during sudden maneu- The center rear seat head restraint should vers, rapid braking or an accident. only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be G014845 correctly adjusted to the passenger’s Rear edge of seat cushion height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper- Catch most point of the seat occupant's ear. Folding down the backrest NOTE Location of the head restraint in the seat When folding down the rear seat backrests, cushion remove the plug in the rear 12-volt socket to To fold down one or both sections: help avoid marks in the upholstery.

114 04 Interior

Trunk

Load anchoring eyelets

04 G018099

The eyelets in the trunk can be used to fasten accessory load and lashing straps, load nets, and other load anchors.

115 Remote key and key blade...... 118 Valet locking ...... 122 Keyless drive*...... 123 Locking and unlocking...... 127 Child safety locks...... 129 Alarm*...... 130

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM 05 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote keys NOTE Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Two remote keys that also function as ignition Each of the keys supplied with your car con- Additional or duplicate remote control keys keys are provided with your car. The remote can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo tains a coded transponder. The code in the key keys contain detachable metal key blades for Retailer. is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition manually locking or unlocking the driver's door switch where it is compared to the code stored You can also obtain additional or duplicate and the glove compartment. in the start inhibitor module. The car will start remote control keys from certain independ- only with a properly coded key. If you misplace USA – FCC ID: LTQVO315TX ent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each a key, take the other keys to an authorized This device complies with part 15 of the FCC key must be programmed to work with your Volvo retailer for reprogramming as an antitheft rules. Operation is subject to the following con- vehicle. measure. ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful California Only: interference, and (2) this device must accept CAUTION any interference received, including interfer- A list of independent repair facilities and/or ence that may cause undesired operation. locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and Never use force on the narrow section of the code replacement keys can be found: remote key – this is where the transponder is located. The car cannot be started if the 05 Canada – IC: 3659AVO315TX on the Volvo website at • transponder is damaged. Operation is subject to the following condi- http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- • by calling Volvo Customer Care at ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- 1-800-458-1552 USA – FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO ference, including interference that may cause This device complies with part 15 of the FCC undesired operation of the device. rules. Operation is subject to the following con- Each key blade has a unique code, which is dition: (1) This device may not cause harmful used if new key blades are required. A maxi- Loss of a remote key interference, and (2) this device must accept mum of six remote keys/key blades can be any interference received, including interfer- If either of the remote keys is lost, the other programmed and used for one car. ence that may cause undesired operation. should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost Canada – IC: 3659A-WFS125VO remote key must be erased from the system. Operation is subject to the following condi- tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter- ference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

118 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Remote key functions Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the 2 minutes unless a door or the trunk has remote once to unlock the driver's door. been opened. After a short pause, press the Unlock but- • Automatic locking: When the car starts to ton a second time within 10 seconds to move, the doors and trunk can be locked unlock the other doors and the trunk. A automatically. This feature can be turned long press (at least several seconds) opens on or off, see Personal settings on page all side windows. 83 for more information. • Airbag deployment will automatically NOTE attempt to unlock the doors. • The turn signals flash to confirm that the Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle has been correctly locked/ car: Press the button on the remote key to unlocked with the remote key or the illuminate the area around the car in dark optional keyless drive. When locking the conditions. Pressing the button once lights vehicle, the turn signals will flash a con- up the interior lighting, parking lights, and G019402 firmation only if all the doors are license plate lighting. These lights will 05 securely closed and locked. Flashing switch off automatically after 30, 60 or Lock – Press the Lock button on the confirmation for locking and unlocking 90 seconds. See the Personal settings pa remote once to lock all doors and the trunk. may be customized in the vehicle's Per- ge 83 for information about adjusting the The turn signals will flash once to confirm sonal settings menu, see page 83 for time setting. locking. more information. Unlock trunk – Press the button once to • The two-step unlocking function can be disarm the alarm system and unlock only NOTE changed so that one press of the the trunk. After closing, the trunk will not Unlock button unlocks all of the doors The car can also be locked if a door is open automatically relock. Press Lock to relock and the trunk. See Personal settings (does not apply to vehicles with the optional it and rearm the alarm. keyless drive). page 83 for more information. NOTE • Automatic relocking: If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reen- This function will unlock, but not pop open, gage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after the trunk.



119 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

Panic alarm – This button can be used to When the battery begins to lose its charge, the The old battery should be disposed of properly attract attention during emergency situa- Information symbol in the instrument panel at a recycling center or by a trained and quali- tions. To activate the panic alarm, press (see page 56) lights up and KEY BATTERY fied Volvo service technician. and hold the red button for at least 3 sec- LOW VOLTAGE is shown in the information onds or press it twice within 3 seconds. display. Key blade The turn signals and horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically Replacing the battery in the remote key after 30 seconds. To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and press the red If the range of the transmitter is noticeably button again. reduced, this indicates that the battery (type CR 2450, 3V) is weak and should be replaced. To replace the battery: NOTE 1. Place the remote key with the keypad This button will NOT unlock the car. downward. Pry open the cover with a small slotted screwdriver. 05 Weak battery in the remote key 2. Remove the cover.

CAUTION G019403 When replacing the battery, avoid touching the electrical circuitry in the other half of the Removing the key blade remote key. The key blade can be removed from the remote key. When removed, it can be used as follows: 3. Note how the + and – sides of the battery are positioned on the inside of the cover • To lock/unlock the driver’s door (see the underside of the cover). • To lock/unlock the glove compartment, see page 128. 4. Pry out and replace the battery. Avoid touching the battery and its contact surfa- • For valet locking (see page 122) ces with your fingers. Removing the key blade G019406 5. Press the cover back into place. Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

120 05 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade

While holding the catch, pull the key blade Locking the doors with the detached key out of the remote key. blade 1. Lock the other door(s) by pressing the lock Reinserting the key blade in the remote button on each door. Please note that this key does not arm the alarm or lock the trunk. 1. Hold the remote key with the pointed end down. 2. Turn the key blade one-quarter turn coun- ter-clockwise to lock the driver's door. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.

Unlocking the doors with the detached key blade 1. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. 05 2. Turn the key blade clockwise approxi- mately one-quarter turn to unlock the driv- er's door only.

NOTE After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the alarm.

To disable the alarm Press the Unlock button on the remote key, or insert the key in the ignition switch.

121 05 Locks and alarm

Valet locking

Locking points Turn the key blade 180° clockwise to lock the glove compartment and disconnect the trunk from the central locking system (a mes- sage appears in the information display) G033839

G000000 remote key: Locking/unlocking points with key 05 blade removed (with valet locking activated) remote key: Normal locking/unlocking points By utilizing the remote key without the key Give the parking attendant or service person- blade, the valet locking feature enables you to G020032 nel only the remote key (with the key blade removed). block access to the trunk and glove compart- Activating/deactivating the valet locking function ment for e.g., valet parking or when the car is Deactivating valet locking: Remove the key blade from the glove com- brought to the retailer for service. partment lock. Turn the key blade 180° counterclockwise in To use the valet locking function, begin by the glove compartment lock to deactivate valet The rear seat backrests must also be locked in removing the key blade from the remote key locking (the trunk can then be unlocked using the upright position. (see page 120). the remote key). Then use the key blade to : Turn the key clockwise in the unlock the rear seat backrests. Activating valet locking: Driver’s side lock on the upper outboard edge of the back- Insert the key blade in the glove compart- rest. ment lock. Passenger’s side: Turn the key counterclock- wise in the lock on the upper outboard edge of the backrest.

122 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless locking and unlocking Both of the remote keys provided with the vehi- Locking the vehicle cle have the keyless function, and additional remotes can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six keyless drive remote keys.

NOTE The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the Personal settings menu, see page 83 for additional information.

Unlocking the vehicle A keyless drive remote key must be on the

• G020033

G019423 same side of the vehicle as the door to be 05 Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) Keyless drive lock button (1.5 meters) of the lock or the trunk opening control (see The doors and the trunk can be locked by the shaded areas in the illustration). This system makes it possible to unlock and pressing the lock button in any of the outside lock the vehicle without having to use the • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door handles. remote key. It is only necessary to have a key- door or press the trunk opening control. less drive remote key in your possession to • See page 146 for information on starting a NOTE operate the central locking system. vehicle equipped with keyless drive. • If one or more doors and/or the trunk is not fully closed when the lock button is NOTE pressed, the door(s) or trunk will not be The buttons on the keyless drive remote key locked. can also be used to lock and unlock the • On keyless drive vehicles with an auto- vehicle, see page 118 for more information. matic transmission, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position and the ignition must be switched off before the doors/trunk can be locked.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the to unlock the driver's door only. This will NOTE key blade trigger the alarm. If several people carrying keyless drive • To disable the alarm: Press the Unlock remote keys approach the vehicle at the button on the keyless drive remote key. If same time, the driver's seat will assume the the batteries in the remote are weak, position it was in for the person who opens remove the keyless drive start control from a door first. the ignition switch by pressing the catch (see the illustration on page 146) and pull- ing the control out of the ignition switch. Keyless drive information messages Insert the ignition key section of a keyless If anyone leaves the vehicle with the only key- drive remote key in the ignition switch. less drive remote key in his or her possession while the ignition is switched on, a message will Keyless drive remote key and driver's be shown in the information display and an seat memory audible signal will sound. This function is only available on vehicles equipped with the optional power driver's seat. 05 G020225 NOTE When you leave the car with a keyless drive Keyless drive keyhole cover • This message will only be displayed if the remote key in your possession and lock start control is in position I or II. The driver's door on vehicles equipped with any door, the position of the driver's seat keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with will be stored in the seat's memory. The message will be erased from the display the remote key's detachable key blade if nec- • The next time a door is opened by a person and the audible signal will stop when the essary, see page 120 for information on remov- with the same remote key in his/her pos- remote key has been returned to the vehicle ing the key blade from the remote key. To session, the driver's seat will automatically and one of the following has occurred: access the keyhole in the driver's door: move to the position that it was in when the • A door has been opened and closed • Pry off the keyhole cover by inserting the door was most recently locked. key blade or a small screwdriver in the hole • The start control has been turned to posi- on the underside of the cover (indicated by tion 0 the arrow in the inset illustration). • The READ button (see page 61 for the • Insert the key blade as far as possible in the location of this button) has been pressed. driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clockwise approximately one-quarter turn

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

CAUTION KR55WK48964 Location of the keyless drive antennas NOTE • Keyless drive remote keys should never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a This device complies with part 15 of the FCC break-in, a remote found in the vehicle Rules. Operation is subject to the following two could make it possible to start the conditions: (1) This device may not cause engine. harmful interference, and (2) this device must • Electromagnetic fields or metal accept interference received, including inter- obstructions can interfere with the key- ference that may cause undesired operation. less drive system. Avoid placing the CAUTION remote key near cellular phones, metal- lic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada – IC:267T- 5WK48952, Siemens VDO G020076 267T- 5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 5WK48891 05 NOTE The keyless drive system has a number of Tested To Comply With FCC Standards This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry antennas located at various points in the vehi- Canada. Operation is subject to the following For Automobile Use cle. two conditions: (1) This device may not cause On the inside center of the rear bumper harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including inter- Left rear door handle ference that may cause undesired operation. Under the floor of the trunk, near the rear CAUTION seat Changes or modifications not expressly Right rear door handle approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Under the rear section of the center con- sole USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, Under the front section of the center con- sole



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help pre- vent interference between the pacemaker and the keylesss drive system.

05

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the NOTE Opening the trunk from the inside2 inside • The ignition key must be in position I or higher (see page 143) before all side windows can be opened using the switches in the front doors. • The doors cannot be opened by pulling up the lock buttons. • Each door can also be locked manually using the lock button on that particular door. This applies only if the car has not been locked from the outside. • The doors can also be unlocked (and the door opened) by pulling the handle

in the door twice. G030709

G007451 05 The vehicle is equipped with a florescent han- The switch near the door opening handle on dle on the inside of the trunk lid, which can be the driver's door can be used to lock or unlock used in an emergency situation to open the all doors and the trunk, open the side win- trunk from the inside. 1 dows , and to set the alarm. • Pull the handle down to release the trunk Unlocking: Press the upper section of the lid. switch. A long press (for several seconds) After use, the handle must be pushed back into also opens all the side windows. its original position before the trunk can be Locking: Press the lower section of the closed. switch.

1 This function must be set to On in the Personal settings menu (see page 84) 2 U.S. models only. 

127 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking the glove compartment G020034 05 The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key blade on the remote key, see page 120 for informa- tion on removing the key blade from the remote key. Insert the key blade in the glove compart- ment lock. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

Unlock the glove compartment in the reverse order.

128 05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

Manual child safety locks, rear doors G014697 05 The controls are located on the rear inside edges of the doors, and are only accessible when the doors are open. 1. Remove the key blade from the remote key, see page 120. 2. Turn the control with the key blade. The door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can be opened from the inside.

129 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

The alarm system The alarm indicator light • Fault in the alarm system: If a fault has The alarm is automatically armed whenever the been detected in the alarm system, a mes- car is locked with the remote key, or if a front sage will be shown in the information dis- lock button is depressed. play. Contact your Volvo retailer to have the alarm system inspected and repaired if When armed, the alarm continuously monitors necessary. a number of points on the car. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: Arming the alarm • The hood is forced open. Press the LOCK button on the remote key, • The trunk is forced open. or press the central lock button on one of • A door is forced open. the front doors with the door open. One long flash of the turn signals will confirm The ignition switch is tampered with • that the alarm is armed. • An attempt is made to start the car with a

non-approved key (a key not coded to the G020227 05 car's ignition). Disarming the alarm Alarm indicator light If there is movement in the passenger com- Press the UNLOCK button on the remote • 1 partment (if the car is equipped with the The status of the alarm system is indicated by key or insert the key in the ignition to dis- optional movement sensor). the indicator light on at the top of the dash- arm the alarm. Two short flashes from the board (see the illustration): car's direction indicators confirm that the The car is lifted or towed (if the car is equip- • alarm has been deactivated and that all ped with the optional inclination sensor) • Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed doors are unlocked. • The battery is disconnected (while the • The indicator light flashes every two sec- alarm is armed). onds – the alarm is armed • The siren is disconnected when the alarm • The indicator light flashes rapidly before is disarmed. the ignition is switched on – the alarm has been triggered. The message ALARM TRIGGERED CHECK CAR will also be displayed.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, press in the start control in the ignition switch.

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Turning off (stopping) the alarm Temporarily turning off the accessory In certain situations it may be desirable to turn If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by alarm sensor(s) off the accessory inclination and movement pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your key or by inserting the key in the ignition switch. vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the The driver's door must first be unlocked with boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in the key blade. the vehicle with the doors locked. To do so: NOTE 1. Press MENU to enter the menu system and On vehicles equipped with the optional key- scroll to Car settings… (for a more less drive, the start control must be detailed description of the menus, see removed from the ignition switch before the page 83. key can be inserted, see page 146 for instructions. 2. Select Reduced guard…. 3. Select Activate once and the message Audible/visual alarm signal REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL will 05 appear in the information display. The An audible alarm signal is given by a battery alarm sensors will be turned off when the powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for vehicle is locked. 30 seconds. or NOTE Select Ask on exit. Each time the ignition

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing G026313 key is turned to position 0, the message all turn signals and turning on the interior Reduced guard ask on exit Press lighting for approximately 5 minutes. Display ENTER to reduce guard until engine MENU has started. Press EXIT to cancel. will be displayed. Select one of the alterna- EXIT tives: ENTER • If the alarm sensors are to be deactivated, press ENTER and then lock the vehicle. Menu navigation controls



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

The next time the ignition key is turned to posi- interference that may cause undesired opera- tion II, the sensors will be reactivated and tion of the device. FULL GUARD will displayed. or • If you do not wish to deactivate the sen- sors, do not choose an alternative and lock the vehicle or press EXIT and lock the vehi- cle.

CAUTION • The accessory sensors are automati- cally reconnected to the alarm system the next time the vehicle is unlocked 05 and then locked again. • This function will not turn off the vehi- cle's standard alarm.

U.S.A. FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following con- ditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired operation.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

05

133 134 *

Option/accessory, for more information, seeIntroduction. Park assist* Blind SpotInformationSystem (BLIS)* Transporting loads...... Detachable trailerhitch 162 Towing atrailer...... Jump starting 159 Towing...... 157 Stability system...... 156 Parking brake...... Brake system 152 All WheelDrive*...... Shiftlock override Automatic transmission* Manual transmission,6-speed* Manual transmission,5-speed* 146 Starting thevehiclewithkeylessdrive*...... Starting thevehicle Ignition switch Fuel requirements 136 General information...... 170 ...... 153 ...... 161 ...... 143 ...... 151 ...... 140 ...... 144 ...... 164 ...... 149 ...... 148 ...... 147 ...... 166 ...... 165 ......

G020912 STARTING AND DRIVING 06 06 Starting and driving

General information

Economical driving conserves natural • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, WARNING resources increase air resistance and also fuel con- sumption. Driving with the trunk open: Driving with Better driving economy may be obtained by the trunk open could lead to poisonous thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops • At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- exhaust gases entering the passenger com- and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to tion will be lower with the air conditioning partment. If the trunk must be kept open for immediate traffic conditions. on and the windows closed than with the any reason, proceed as follows: air conditioning off and the windows open. Observe the following rules: 1. Close the windows. • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- consumption modes can help you learn 2. Set the ventilation system control to air perature as soon as possible by driving how to drive more economically. flow to floor, windshield and side win- with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for dows and the blower control to its high- the first few minutes of operation. A cold Other factors that decrease gas mileage est setting. engine uses more fuel and is subject to are: increased wear. • Dirty air cleaner Weight distribution affects handling • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle • Dirty engine oil and clogged At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a for driving short distances. This does not • Dragging brakes allow the engine to reach normal operating tendency to understeer, which means that the temperature. • Incorrect front end alignment steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration Some of the above mentioned items and others • bend. This ensures good stability and reduces 06 and hard braking. are checked at the standard maintenance intervals. the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position these properties can alter with the vehicle load. as often as possible and avoid using kick- The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less down. the tendency to understeer. • Do not exceed posted speed limits. • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load) in the vehicle. • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire pressure regularly (when tires are cold). • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or ice has ended.

136 06 Starting and driving

General information

Handling, roadholding CAUTION Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure not be mixed. Engine damage will occur if water is all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check • Volvo recommends using only genuine drawn into the air cleaner. • that the tires are inflated to the recommended Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. pressure according to the vehicle load. See the • If the vehicle is driven through water Your Volvo retailer stocks plenty of Volvo "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- deeper than 9 in. (25 cm), water may engine coolant to help protect your vehicle tributed so that capacity weight or maximum enter the differential and the transmis- during cold weather. sion. This reduces the oil's lubricating permissible axle loads are not exceeded. Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this capacity and may shorten the service • prevents the formation of condensation in life of these components. Driving through water the tank. In addition, in extremely cold • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in weather conditions it is worthwhile to add The vehicle can be driven through water up to water up to the door sills longer than fuel line de-icer before refueling. a depth of approximately 9 in. (25 cm), at a absolutely necessary. This could result The viscosity of the engine oil is important. maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). in electrical malfunctions. • Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves • Take particular care when driving through • If the engine has been stopped while the cold-weather starting as well as decreas- flowing water. car is in water, do not attempt to restart ing fuel consumption while the engine is • Clean the electrical connections for trailer the engine. Have the car towed out of warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, par- wiring after driving in mud or water the water. ticularly the synthetic type1, is recom- mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but When driving through water, maintain low • do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving speed and do not stop in the water. 06 Cold weather precautions or in warm weather, see page 273 for more If you wish to check your vehicle before the information. WARNING approach of cold weather, the following advice • The load placed on the battery is greater After driving through water, press lightly on is worth noting: during the winter since the windshield wip- the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes Make sure that the engine coolant contains ers, lighting, etc. are used more often. are functioning normally. Water or mud can • 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture Moreover, the capacity of the battery make the brake linings slippery, resulting in decreases as the temperature drops. In delayed braking effect. will reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to –31 °F very cold weather, a poorly charged bat- (–35 °C). See section "Coolant". The use of tery can freeze and be damaged. It is there- "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by fore advisable to check the state of charge

1 Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer. 

137 06 Starting and driving

General information

more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil Conserving electrical current NOTE on the battery posts. Keep the following in mind to help minimize If the ignition is switched on, a warning Volvo recommends the use of snow tires battery drain: • • message will be displayed in the text on all four wheels for winter driving – see When the engine is not running, avoid turn- window in the instrument panel when the chapter "Wheels and tires." • ing the ignition key to position II. Many the battery charge is low. To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from • electrical systems (the audio system, the An energy conserving function freezing, add washer solvents containing • optional navigation system, power win- designed into the vehicle's electrical antifreeze (see page 216 for the location of dows, etc) will function with the ignition key system will switch off certain functions the washer fluid reservoir). This is impor- in position I. This position reduces drain on or reduce the load on the battery by, tant since dirt is often splashed on the the battery. e.g., reducing the audio system's vol- windshield during winter driving, requiring Please keep in mind that using systems, ume. the frequent use of the washers and wip- • accessories, etc that consume a great deal ers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilu- of current when the engine is not running ted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): could result in the battery being completely 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water Before a long distance trip drained. Driving or having the engine run- Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer sol- It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle ning for approximately 15 minutes will help vent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F checked at a trained and qualified Volvo serv- keep the battery charged. (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts ice technician before driving long distances. water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part • The optional 12 volt socket in the trunk Your trained and qualified Volvo service tech- washer solvent and 1 part water. (certain models only) provides electrical nician will also be able to supply you with 06 current even with the ignition switched off, • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for which drains the battery. your use in the event that problems occur. NOTE As a minimum, the following items should be checked before any long trip: Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks. • Check that engine runs smoothly and that fuel consumption is normal. • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage • Have the transmission oil level checked2. • Check condition of drive belts.

2 To prevent injury from contact with hot surfaces, do not inspect your vehicle's transmission fluid yourself. Have your vehicle's transmission fluid level inspected by a qualified Volvo service technician.

138 06 Starting and driving

General information

• Check state of the battery's charge. • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as well), and replace those that are worn. Check tire pressures. • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by your Volvo retailer only. • Check all lights, including high beams. • Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. • Have a word with your Volvo retailer if you intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel. • Consider your destination. If you will be driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider snow tires.

06

139 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Octane rating change gasoline brands to fully utilize your Use of Additives engine's capacity, and for the smoothest pos- With the exception of gas line antifreeze during Minimum octane sible operation. winter months, do not add solvents, thicken- ers, or other store-bought additives to your NOTE vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be neces- of these additives contain organically volatile sary to fill the tank more than once before a chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself difference in engine operation is noticeable. to these chemicals.

Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a Never carry a cell phone that is switched knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone G028920 Besides damaging the exhaust emission con- rings, this may cause a spark that could trol systems on your vehicle, lead has been ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and Typical pump octane label injury. strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- formance, but using 87 octane1 or above will Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. WARNING not affect engine reliability. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to 06 certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated where you must fill your own gas tank, take and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust horsepower, torque, and fuel economy per- precautions. These may include: gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes formance using premium 91 octane fuel. inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle compartment is ventilated, and immediately Demanding driving while refueling return the vehicle to a trained and qualified In demanding driving conditions, such as oper- • refueling only at gas stations with vapor Volvo service technician for correction. ating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, recovery systems that fully seal the mouth or driving for extended periods at higher alti- of the filler neck during refueling tudes than normal, it may be advisable to • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to fuel filler nozzle.

1 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.

140 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

Deposit control gasoline (detergent ness of the emission control system and could use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; how- additives) result in loss of emission warranty coverage. ever, the octane ratings listed on this page Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- State and local vehicle inspection programs must still be met. will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- oline to control engine deposits. Detergent Alcohol – Ethanol: Fuels containing up to 10% sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may fueled vehicles. intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gaso- control gasolines will help ensure good driva- hol". bility and fuel economy. If you are not sure NOTE whether the gasoline contains deposit control Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain MTBE may be used. additives, check with the service station oper- an octane enhancing additive called methyl- ator. cyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl Methanol (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE Control System performance may be affec- ted, and the Check Engine Light (malfunc- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo does not recommend the use of tion indicator lamp) located on your instru- can result in vehicle performance deterioration store-bought fuel injector cleaning addi- ment panel may light. If this occurs, please and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- tives. return your vehicle to a trained and qualified tem. Such damage may not be covered under Volvo service technician for maintenance. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Unleaded fuel Fuel filler door Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers 06 Press the button on the light switch panel (see and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing Canadian regulations require that pumps deliv- "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or the illustration on page 64) with the ignition ering unleaded gasoline be labelled "UNLEA- ethers. In some areas, state or local laws switched off to unlock the fuel filler door. DED". Only these pumps have nozzles which require that the service pump be marked indi- Please note that the fuel filler door will remain fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dis- cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, unlocked until the vehicle begins to move for- pense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled there are areas in which the pumps are ward. An audible click will be heard when the "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is fuel filler door relocks. damages the three-way catalytic converter and alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated with the service station operator. To meet sea- being refueled, this feature enables you to lock use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective- sonal air quality standards, some areas require the doors/trunk while leaving the fuel filler door the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the unlocked.



141 06 Starting and driving

Fuel requirements

You can also keep the vehicle locked if you CAUTION under the New Vehicle Limited War- remain inside it during refueling. The central ranty. locking button does not lock the fuel filler door. • Do not refuel with the engine running2. Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and ignition is on, an incorrect reading could is completely closed after refueling. Open the occur in the fuel gauge fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. • After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into Refueling place. The fuel tank is designed to accommodate • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not possible expansion of the fuel in hot weather, press the handle on the filler nozzle see page 271 for fuel tank volume. Be aware more than one extra time. Too much fuel that the "usable" tank capacity will be some- in the tank in hot weather conditions can what less than the specified maximum. When cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling the fuel level is low, such factors as ambient could also cause damage to the emis- temperature, the fuel's "Reid vapor pressure" sion control systems. characteristics, and terrain can affect the fuel • Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. pump's ability to supply the engine with an In addition to causing damage to the adequate supply of fuel. Therefore, it is advis- environment, gasolines containing able to refuel as soon as possible when the alcohol can cause damage to painted 06 needle nears the red zone, or when the fuel surfaces, which may not be covered warning light comes on. under the New Vehicle Limited War- ranty. • Do not use gasolines containing meth- anol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle per- formance deterioration and can dam- age critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered

2 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle’s performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

142 06 Starting and driving

Ignition switch

Ignition switch positions II – Drive position The key's position when driv- 0 – Locked position ing. The vehicle's entire elec- Remove the key to lock the trical system is activated. steering wheel1. Never turn the key to position 0 while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. III – Start position Turn the key to this position NOTE and release it immediately. The key returns automatically A ticking sound may be audible if the key is to the Drive position. turned to a position between 0 and I. To stop this sound, turn the key to position II A chime will sound if the key and back to position 0. is left in the ignition and the driver's door is opened (does not apply to vehi- I – Intermediate position2 cles with the optional keyless drive). Certain accessories, radio, etc. on, daytime running lights off. 06

1 Automatic transmission: the gear selector must be in the Park position. The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed. 2 Please be aware that leaving the key in this positions I or II will increase battery drain.

143 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

To start the engine 3. The vehicle is equipped with an autostart NOTE feature. Without touching the throttle WARNING pedal, turn the key to position III and • Immobilizer: If two of the keys to your Before starting, check that the seat, steering release it. The starter motor will then oper- vehicle are close together, e.g., on the wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. ate automatically (for up to ten seconds) same key ring when you try to start the Make sure the brake pedal can be until the engine starts. If the engine fails to vehicle, this could cause interference in depressed completely. Adjust the seat if start, repeat this step. the immobilizer system and result in the necessary. vehicle not starting. If this should occur, 4. To release the gear selector from the Park remove one of the keys from the key 1. Fasten the seat belt. (P) position, the engine must be running (or ring before trying to start the vehicle the ignition key must be in position II) and again. 2. Apply the parking brake if not already set. the brake pedal must be depressed. • Keylock: Models equipped an auto- The gear selector should be locked in the 5. Select the desired gear. On models with an matic transmission have a keylock sys- Park (P) position (Shiftlock). See also page tem. When the engine is switched off, 151. automatic transmission, the gear engages after a very slight delay which is especially the gear selector must be in the Park Manual transmission: The clutch must be noticeable when selecting R. (P) position before the key can be fully depressed. removed from the ignition switch1. • When starting in cold weather, the NOTE transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than normal until 06 After a cold start, idle speed may be notice- the automatic transmission fluid rea- ably higher than normal for a short period. ches normal operating temperature. This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal • Do not race a cold engine immediately operating temperature as quickly as possi- after starting. Oil flow may not reach ble, which enables them to control emis- some lubrication points fast enough to sions and help reduce the vehicle's impact prevent engine damage. on the environment.

1 The optional keyless drive start control does not need to be removed from the ignition switch.

144 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

WARNING Volvo's floor mats are specially manufac- tured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. • Always place the gear selector in Park (P) (manual transmission: first or reverse gear) and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehi- cle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- ide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous. 06 CAUTION Automatic transmission: The engine should be idling when you move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage! Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature trans- mission wear. Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the auto- matic transmission fluid.

145 06 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle with keyless drive*

Starting a vehicle with keyless drive 1. Press the brake pedal (the clutch pedal must also be fully depressed on models with a manual transmission). 2. Press in the keyless drive start control and turn it to position III.

NOTE The vehicle is equipped with an autostart function that makes it possible to start the engine without holding the start control in position III. Turn the start control to posi- tion III and release it. The starter motor will then operate automatically (for up to ten seconds) until the engine starts. G019420 G019410 Removing the keyless drive start control Starting the vehicle with the ignition key Keyless drive makes it possible to unlock, start Press the catch on the side of the start con- and lock the vehicle without using a remote (remote key) trol (see the illustration). key. A vehicle with keyless drive can also be started with the ignition key (if, for example, the battery Pull the keyless drive start control out of the 06 A start control is fitted in the ignition switch on in the keyless drive remote key is weak). To do ignition switch. vehicles equipped with the optional keyless so: Insert the remote key into the ignition switch drive. This control is used in the same way as the ignition key to start the engine. See also and turn it to position III to start the engine, page 144 for general information on starting page 144 for complete starting information. the engine.

NOTE A keyless drive remote key must be inside the vehicle in order to start the engine.

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Manual transmission, 5-speed*

5-speed manual transmission Engaging reverse gear, 5-speed CAUTION transmission Never shift into reverse while moving for- ward.

WARNING An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Not more than one protective floor covering may be used at one time. G018256 G018257 • Depress the clutch pedal completely when changing gears.1 Reverse gear should only be engaged from a • Remove your foot from the clutch pedal complete stop. while driving. The shift pattern should be 06 followed. NOTE • Overdrive (5th gear) should be used as Reverse gear is electronically blocked to often as possible to help improve fuel help prevent it from being selected while the economy. vehicle is moving foward.

1 Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is not depressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 06 Starting and driving

Manual transmission, 6-speed*

6-speed manual transmission Engaging reverse gear, 6-speed CAUTION transmission Never shift into reverse while moving for- ward.

WARNING An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator, brake, and/or clutch pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Not more than one protective floor covering may be used at one time. G018258 G018259 • Depress the clutch pedal completely when changing gears1 Reverse gear should only be engaged from a • Remove your foot from the clutch pedal complete stop. 06 while driving. The shift pattern should be followed. NOTE • Overdrive (5th and 6th gears) should be Reverse gear is electronically blocked to used as often as possible to help improve help prevent it from being selected while the fuel economy. vehicle is moving foward.

1 Clutch interlock: The clutch must be fully depressed before you can start your car. If the clutch is notdepressed, it will not be possible to start the engine.

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission*

Shiftgate positions Gear selector positions R – Reverse The car must be stationary when shifting to P – Park position R. Select the P position when starting or parking. In P, the transmission is mechanically blocked N – Neutral (Shiftlock). Always apply the parking brake N is the neutral position. The engine can be when parking. started, but no gear is selected. Apply the park- ing brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in N.

NOTE If the gear selector is in the Neutral position and the vehicle has been at a standstill for at least 3 seconds, the brake pedal must be

G020237 pressed before the gear selector can be moved to another position. Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the selector between In order to move the gear selector to another the R, N, D, and P positions. position: The gear selector can be moved freely between 1. Turn the ignition key to position II (if the 06 the (manual shifting) and Drive (D) G018264 engine is not already running). positions while driving. D - left position: automatic shifting, M - right posi- 2. Depress the brake pedal. tion: manual shifting 3. Move the gear selector to the desired posi- CAUTION tion. The car must be stationary when selecting D – Drive position P. D is the normal driving position. The Drive posi- tion offers 5 forward gears1. The car automat- ically shifts between the various forward gears,

1 T5 models have 6 forward gears. 

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 06 Starting and driving

Automatic transmission*

based on the level of acceleration and speed. time and will utilize the braking power of Kickdown will not occur if the driver attempts The car must be at a standstill when shifting to the engine. If the current speed is too high to use this function when engine speeds are position D from position R. for using a lower gear, the downshift will too high. The transmission will remain in the not occur until the speed has decreased currently selected gear. enough to allow the lower gear to be used. Manual shifting – Geartronic • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- The manual shifting mode (Geartronic) can be mission will automatically shift down. selected at any time to manually select forward gears, including while the car is moving. Cold starts (turbo engines) NOTE When driving before the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, the transmis- Reverse, Neutral, and Park cannot be sion will shift up at slightly higher engine selected in Geartronic mode. speeds to heat the three-way catalytic con- verter as quickly as possible. • To access the Manual (M) shifting position from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right to M. Kickdown • To return to the Drive (D) position from M, Automatic shift to a lower gear (kickdown) is move the gear selector to the left. achieved by depressing the accelerator pedal 06 fully and briskly. An upshift will occur when While driving approaching the top speed for a particular gear • If you select the M position while driving, or by releasing the accelerator pedal slightly. the gear that was being used in the Drive Kickdown can be used for maximum acceler- position will also initially be selected in the ation or when passing at highway speeds. M position. Safety function • Move the gear selector forward To help prevent excessive engine speeds (rpm) (toward "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward "–") to shift to a lower that could lead to engine damage, the engine gear. management system includes a function that prevents kickdown from taking place if the • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the engine speed is too high. transmission will downshift one gear at a

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Shiftlock override

Overriding the shiftlock system 4. Insert the key blade, see page 120, into the opening and press it down until it bottoms. 5. With the key blade pressed down, move the gear selector out of the P position. G018263

Shiftlock prevents the gear selector from being moved out of the Pposition unless the ignition key is in position II and the brake pedal is depressed. 06 In certain cases it may be necessary to move the gear selector from the Pposition manually. To manually override the Shiftlock system: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal. 3. There is a small cover below P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open the rear edge of the panel.

151 06 Starting and driving

All Wheel Drive*

All Wheel Drive (AWD) – general Temporary Spare information The temporary spare tire is for temporary, low- Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent speed, short-distance use only. Replace it with All Wheel Drive, which means that power is a full-sized tire as soon as possible. Do not distributed automatically between the front drive on the temporary spare at speeds above and rear wheels. Under normal driving condi- 50 mph (80 km/h). tions, most of the engine's power is directed to Never install snow chains on a temporary the front wheels. However, if there is any ten- spare. dency for the front wheels to spin, an electron- ically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction.

Tire dimensions Volvo recommends that you always drive on tires of the same brand, size, construction (radial), tread pattern, load, speed, traction, temperature, and treadwear rating. Never drive on mixed tires, except for brief periods when the temporary spare tire is in use. 06 Always use properly inflated tires of correct dimensions. Tire size and inflation pressures are shown on a placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). See also page 181 for the tire infla- tion pressure tables beginning, .

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Brake lights If the brake pedal must be depressed farther Power brakes function only when the The brake lights come on automatically when than normal and requires greater foot pressure, engine is running the brakes are applied. the stopping distance will be longer. The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure A warning light in the instrument panel will light which is only created when the engine is run- Adaptive brake lights up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the The adaptive brake lights activate in the event engine switched off. of sudden braking or if the ABS system is acti- If this light comes on while driving or braking, vated. This function causes an additional tail- stop immediately and check the brake fluid If the power brakes are not working, consider- light on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to level in the reservoir. ably higher pressure will be required on the help alert vehicles traveling behind. brake pedal to compensate for the lack of NOTE power assistance. This can happen for exam- The adaptive brake lights activate if: ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine is • The ABS system activates for more than Press the brake pedal hard and maintain switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The pressure on the pedal – do not pump the brake pedal feels harder than usual. approximately a half second brakes. • In the event of sudden braking while the vehicle is moving at speeds above approx- Water on brake discs and brake pads imately 6 mph (10 km/h) WARNING affects braking When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the Driving in rain and slush or passing through an lights and additional taillights remain on for as reservoir or if a brake system message is automatic car wash can cause water to collect long as the brake pedal is depressed or until shown in the information display, DO NOT on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a 06 braking force on the vehicle is reduced. DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo delay in braking effect when the pedal is retailer and have the brake system inspec- ted. depressed. To avoid such a delay when the Brake circuit malfunction brakes are needed, depress the pedal occa- sionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. The brake system is a hydraulic system con- This will remove the water from the brakes. sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a prob- Check that brake application feels normal. This lem should occur in one of these circuits, it is should also be done after washing or starting still possible to stop the vehicle with the other in very damp or cold weather. brake circuit.



153 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Severe strain on the brake system For optimal ABS braking effect: WARNING The brakes will be subject to severe strain 1. Press down on the brake pedal with full force. The pedal will pulsate. If the BRAKES and ABS warning symbols when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or light at the same time, there may be a prob- when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually 2. Steer the vehicle in the direction of travel lem in the brake system. If the brake fluid slower, which means that the cooling of the and keep the brake pedal depressed. level is normal in these circumstances, drive brakes is less efficient than when driving on carefully to a trained and qualified Volvo level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, Electronic Brake Force Distribution service technician to have the brake system shift into a lower gear and let the engine help (EBD) checked. with the braking. Do not forget that if you are EBD is an integrated part of the ABS system. towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to EBD regulates the hydraulic pressure to the Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA a greater than normal load. rear brakes to help provide optimal braking EBA is designed to provide full brake effect capacity. immediately in the event of sudden, hard brak- Anti-lock brakes (ABS) The switching of the ABS modulator will be ing. The system is activated by the speed with The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to audible and the brake pedal will pulsate during which the brake pedal is depressed. improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) braking. Please be aware that ABS does not When the EBA system is activated, the brake during severe braking conditions by limiting increase the absolute braking potential of the pedal will go down and pressure in the brake brake lockup. When the system "senses" vehicle. While control will be enhanced, ABS system immediately increases to the maximum impending lockup, braking pressure is auto- will not shorten stopping distances on slippery level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal matically modulated in order to help prevent surfaces. in order to utilize the system completely. EBA 06 lockup that could lead to a skid. If the warning lamp lights up there is a mal- is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released. The system performs a self-diagnostic test function of the ABS system (the standard brak- when the engine is started and when the ing system will still function) and the vehicle vehicle first reaches a speed of approxi- should be driven cautiously to a trained and mately 12 mph (20 km/h). The brake pedal will qualified Volvo service technician for inspec- pulsate several times and a sound may be tion. audible from the ABS control module. This is normal.

154 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

NOTE • When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increa- ses to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system com- pletely. There will be no braking effect if the pedal is released. EBA is automati- cally deactivated when the brake pedal is released. • When the vehicle has been parked for some time, the brake pedal may sink more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is released.

06

155 06 Starting and driving

Parking brake

Parking brake (hand brake) 4. If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly. 5. When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in first gear (for manual transmis- sion) or P (for automatic transmission). Parking on a hill • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the curb. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb.

G026348 Releasing the parking brake 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. The parking brake lever is located between the 2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button front seats. at the end of the lever and lower the lever completely. 06 NOTE The indicator light will illuminate even if the WARNING parking brake has only been partially Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to applied. its full extent.

When applying the parking brake 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up firmly to its full extent. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill.

156 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

Stability Traction Control (STC)/ Temporarily switching off Spin control Dynamic Stability Traction Control 1. Turn the thumbwheel (A) on the left-side (DSTC) steering wheel lever until the STC/DSTC The stability system consists of a number of menu is displayed. functions designed help reduce wheel spin, 2. Hold down the RESET button (B) to toggle counteract skidding, and to generally help between STC SPIN CONTROL OFF/STC improve directional stability. ON or DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF/ A pulsating sound will be audible when the DSTC ON. system is actively operating and is normal. NOTE Function/ STC DSTCA • The message STC SPIN CONTROL system OFF/DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF G020349 indicates that the stability system's spin TC X X control function has temporarily been Thumb wheel SC X X switched off. RESET button • The stability control indicator light AYC X will illuminate and remain on until spin A * Spin control (SC) control has been reactivated. The spin control function is designed to help • The spin control function is automati- 06 Traction control (TC) prevent the drive wheels from spinning while cally enabled each time the engine is This function is designed to help reduce wheel the vehicle is accelerating. started. spin by transferring power from a drive wheel Under certain circumstances, such as when • STC ON/DSTC ON indicates that all that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the driving with snow chains, or driving in deep system functions are active. opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily switch off this function for maxi- TC is most active at low speeds. Active yaw control – AYC (DSTC only) mum tractive force1. This is one of the stability system's permanent This function helps maintain directional stabil- functions and cannot be switched off. ity, for example when cornering, by braking

1 Models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) have an integrated traction control function that cannot be disabled. DSTC is optional on AWD models. 

157 06 Starting and driving

Stability system

one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows Symbols used by the stability system the light will stay on as a reminder that this a tendency to skid or slide laterally. function has been disabled by the driver. Stability system indicator light This is one of the stability system's permanent functions and cannot be switched off. WARNING The stability system is intended to help WARNING improve driving safety. It supplements, but Information symbol can never replace, the driver's judgement The car's handling and stability characteris- and responsibility when operating the vehi- tics will be altered if the STC/DSTC system cle. Speed and driving style should always functions have been disabled. be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

STC/DSTC-related messages in the text If the and symbols light up at the same window time, read the message in the display. • "TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF" – The system has been temporarily If only the symbol lights up, this indicates switched off due to high brake temperature one of the following situations: and will automatically switch on again • The light illuminates for approximately when the brakes have cooled. 2 seconds to indicate that the system is • "ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED" – the performing a self-diagnostic test when the 06 system has been automatically disen- engine is started. gaged due to a fault. A trained and qualified • If the light flashes while driving, this indi- Volvo service technician should check the cates that the stability system is actively system. functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid. • If this light stays on after the engine has started or comes on while driving, there may be a fault in the stability system. Con- sult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • If Spin control has been intentionally switched off, a message is displayed and

158 06 Starting and driving

Towing

Emergency towing WARNING 4. Place the gear selector in neutral. For vehi- cles with automatic transmissions, follow Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the instruction on page 151, "Shiftlock over- vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. ride" to allow the gear selector to be moved from the Park position. Towing a vehicle with all four wheels on 5. Keep firm pressure on the brake pedal the ground while releasing the parking brake. 6. When towing has been completed, return WARNING the gear selector to Park (automatic) or Volvo does not recommend towing a disa- Reverse (manual) and apply the parking bled vehicle behind another vehicle. Signif- brake. icant difficulty in steering and braking, com- bined with unfavorable weather, traffic, and The following points should also be road conditions may make it impossible to observed: G030710 maintain vehicle control. • Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Never exceed local towing speed limits and heed The towing eyelet (1) is located under the all local towing restrictions. floor of the trunk. 1. Apply the parking brake. • Never tow farther than 50 miles (80 km). Remove the cover over the openings for WARNING Keep the tow rope taut at all times while the the towing eyelet on the bumpers by prying • 06 vehicle is in motion. open the lower edge with a coin, etc. Towing a vehicle with a locked steering wheel will make the vehicle impossible to • The disabled vehicle should be towed in Screw the towing eyelet in place first by steer. the forward direction only. hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. 2. Insert the key into the ignition to unlock the After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet steering wheel. The steering wheel must be should be removed and returned to its storage unlocked. With the engine off and the vehi- space. cle at a standstill, great effort will be required to turn the steering wheel. 3. Turn the ignition key to position II.



159 06 Starting and driving

Towing

WARNING Towing vehicles with front wheel drive WARNING Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equip- Never allow a vehicle to be towed with- Remember that the power brakes and • ment for towing vehicles with front wheel drive. • out a driver behind the wheel of the dis- power steering will not function when If wheel lift equipment must be used, please abled vehicle. engine is not running. The braking and use extreme caution to help avoid damage to steering systems will function but con- • Never remove the key from the ignition the vehicle. while the vehicle is moving. The steering siderably higher pressure will be wheel could lock, making it impossible In this case, the vehicle should be towed with required on the brake pedal and greater to steer the vehicle. the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. steering effort must be exerted. • When the engine is not running, steering If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle • The towing eyelets must not be used for resistance and the effort needed to with the front wheels on the ground, please pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe apply the brakes will be great. refer to the towing information on the previous strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to page. • Never attempt to tow a vehicle with a pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow dead battery at night. • Sling-type equipment applied at the front truck. will damage radiator and air conditioning CAUTION lines. • It is equally important not to use sling-type • Check with state and local authorities equipment at the rear or apply lifting equip- before attempting this type of towing, ment inside the rear wheels; serious dam- 06 as vehicles being towed are subject to age to the rear axle may result. regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed device, lighting, marker flags, etc. truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Con- • Never attempt to push- or tow-start a sult the tow truck operator. vehicle with a dead battery. This would inject unburned fuel into the three-way catalytic converter(s), causing over- heating, backfiring, and damage, see page 161 for instructions on jump star- ting the vehicle.

160 06 Starting and driving

Jump starting

Jump starting the vehicle your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a WARNING "+" sign. • Do not connect the jumper cable to any 3. Connect the auxiliary battery's negative (–) part of the fuel system or to any moving terminal (3) to the ground point in your parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. vehicle's engine compartment near the Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which driver's side spring strut (4). • is flammable and explosive. 4. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do then start the engine in the vehicle with not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, dead battery. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- 5. After the engine has started, first remove tact occurs, flush the affected area the negative (–) terminal jumper cable. immediately with water. Obtain medical Then remove the positive (+) terminal help immediately if eyes are affected. jumper cable. • Never expose the battery to open flame

G020298 or electric spark. WARNING • Do not smoke near the battery. Follow these instructions to jump start your Failure to follow the instructions for vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! • jump starting can lead to personal vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- injury. 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another sories contain lead and lead compounds, 06 vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touch- chemicals known to the state of California • Do not touch the jumper cables during ing to prevent premature completion of a cir- to cause cancer and reproductive harm. the attempt to start the vehicle. This Wash hands after handling. could cause sparks. cuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instruc- tions provided for the other vehicle. To jump start your vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. First connect the auxiliary battery positive (+) terminal (1) to the positive (+) terminal in

161 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

General information Trailer towing does not normally present any • More frequent vehicle maintenance is • Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer particular problems, but take into considera- required. hitches that are specially designed for the tion: • Remove the ball and drawbar assembly vehicle. • Increase tire pressure to recommended when the hitch is not being used. full. See the chapter "Wheels and tires." • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic CAUTION • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing engine oil when towing a trailer over long Models equipped with the B5244S7 engine heavy trailers during the first 620 miles distances or in mountainous areas. (engine code 39, which is the 6th and (1,000 km). 7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: WARNING number, see page 266 for the location of 50 mph (80 km/h). the VIN plate), may not be used to tow trail- • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must ers or vehicles of any kind. This could cause • Engine and transmission are subject to not be used on , nor should damage to the vehicle's emission control increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant safety chains be attached to the systems. temperature should be closely watched bumper. when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle's Maximum trailer weights recommended by Use a lower gear and turn off the air con- rear axle must not be used. ditioner if the temperature gauge needle Volvo are: Never connect a trailer's hydraulic enters the red range. • • Trailers without brakes: 1,540 lbs brake system directly to the vehicle • If the automatic transmission begins to brake system, nor a trailer's lighting (700 kg). overheat, a message will be displayed in 06 system directly to the vehicle lighting • Trailers with brakes: 2,000 lbs (900 kg) the information display. system. Consult your nearest trained Observe the legal requirements of the • Avoid overload and other abusive opera- and qualified Volvo service technician state/province in which the vehicles are tion. for correct installation. registered. • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety • The maximum recommended hitch ity, and economy. wire must be correctly fastened to the tongue load is 165 lbs (75 kg). hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch It is necessary to balance trailer brakes • on the vehicle. The safety wire should • All Volvo models are equipped with with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a never be fastened to or wound around energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- safe stop (check and observe state/local the drawbar ball. ers. Trailer hitch installation should not regulations). interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system. • Do not connect the trailer's brake system directly to the vehicle's brake system.

162 06 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer

NOTE • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in Park (P) or in reverse on models with a manual transmission. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift positions while towing a trailer, or if the vehicle is equipped with a manual trans- mission, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. 06 • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines exceeding 15%.

163 06 Starting and driving

Detachable trailer hitch

Installing the ball holder 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly. 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assem- bly.

NOTE G030864 A cover for the hitch assembly is also Ball holder included in the kit. Cotter pin

06 Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment Locking bolt 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- bly. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly.

164 06 Starting and driving

Transporting loads

Loading the vehicle WARNING • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's Your vehicle's load-carrying capacity is affec- weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- Remember that an object weighing ted by factors such as: • mum rated roof load of 165 lbs (75 kg). 44 lbs (20 kg) produces a force of Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads the number of passengers 2,200 lbs (1,000 kg) in a head-on colli- • • evenly. tire inflation sion at 30 mph (50 km/h)! • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the When the rear backrest(s) are folded • • the amount of optional or accessory equip- • load. ment installed down, the vehicle should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below • Secure the cargo correctly with appropri- • the amount of cargo. the upper edge of the rear side win- ate tie-down equipment. See the chapter "Wheels and tires" for more dows. Objects placed higher than this • Check periodically that the load carriers detailed information. level could impede the function of the and load are properly secured. Volvo Inflatable Curtain. Before loading the car, turn off the engine, and • Remember that the car's center of gravity apply the parking brake when loading or and handling change when you carry a load on the roof. unloading long objects. The gear selector can Load carriers (accessory) be inadvertently knocked out of position by The car's wind resistance and fuel con- Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- • long cargo, causing the car to move. sumption will increase with the size of the ries. Follow the installation instructions sup- load. plied with the load carriers. Keep the following in mind when • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast loading the vehicle: Observe the following points when using load cornering and hard braking. 06 carriers: • Load objects in the trunk against the rear seat backrest. • To avoid damaging your car and to achieve maximum safety when driving, we recom- Load heavy cargo as low as possible. • mend using the load carriers that Volvo has • Center wide loads. developed especially for your car. • Secure all cargo with restraining straps • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are anchored to the load securing eyelets. designed to carry the maximum allowable • Cover sharp edges on the load. roof load for this vehicle: 165 lbs (75 kg). For Non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- Seats can be folded down and head • ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. restraints removed to extend the cargo compartment, see page 113.

165 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Introduction WARNING B • BLIS is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system. • BLIS does not eliminate the need for A you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner.

The system is based on digital camera tech- nology. The cameras (1) are located beneath G020296 G020295 the side-view mirrors. A = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters), B = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters) BLIS camera When one (or both) of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the Indicator light approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's BLIS symbol your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. 06 (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), the cameras are obscured, a message (see the The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an indicator light in the door panel (2) illuminates. table on page 168) will appear in the informa- information system that indicates the presence The light will glow continuously to alert the tion display in the instrument panel. If this of another vehicle moving in the same direction driver of the vehicle in the blind area. occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind the system can be temporarily switched off (for area". NOTE instructions see page 168). The door panel indicator light illuminates on CAUTION the side of the vehicle where the system has The BLIS system should only be repaired by detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- passed on both sides at the same time, both nician. lights will illuminate.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

When does BLIS function Darkness NOTE The system functions when your vehicle is BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occa- moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). sionally even when there are no other vehi- vehicle in the blind area must have its head- When you pass another vehicle: cles in the blind area, this does not indicate lights on. This means, for example, that the a fault in the system. The system reacts when you pass another system will not detect a trailer without head- vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) lights that is being towed behind a car or truck. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. Service required will be displayed. faster than that vehicle. WARNING When you are passed by another vehicle: The following are several examples of situa- The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by • BLIS does not react to cyclists or tions in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph mopeds. illuminate even when there are no other vehi- (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are cles in the area monitored by the system. standing still. WARNING • The BLIS cameras have the same limi- tation as the human eye. In other words, BLIS does not function in sharp curves. • their "vision is impaired" by adverse • BLIS does not function when your vehi- weather conditions such as heavy cle is backing up. snowfall, intense light directly into the camera, dense fog, etc. • If you are towing a wide trailer, this may 06 prevent the BLIS cameras from detect- ing other vehicles in adjacent lanes. Limitations Light reflected from a wet road surface In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) How BLIS functions in daylight and may illuminate even when there are no other darkness vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehi- cles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

CAUTION when the system is switched off, and a text message is displayed. Clean the lenses carefully to avoid • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing scratching. • the button. The indicator light in the button • The lenses are electrically heated to will illuminate and a new text message will help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gen- be displayed. Press the READ button, see

G018177 tly brush away snow from the lenses. page 61, to erase the message. The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, BLIS system messages smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on Switching BLIS on and off a highway Text in the System status display BLIS SERVICE BLIS not functioning REQUIRED properly. Contact an authorized Volvo serv- ice technician.

BLIS CAMERA BLIS camera obscured. BLOCKED Clean the lenses. Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low 06 on the horizon BLIS ON BLIS system on Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera

lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped G018270 clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. BLIS button (left button in the illustration) BLIS is automatically activated when the igni- tion is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. • The system can be switched off by press- ing the BLIS button in the center console. The indicator light in the button goes out

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)*

Text in the System status display BLIS OFF BLIS system off

BLIS REDUCED The BLIS cameras' FUNCTION function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer between the BLIS sys- tem's cameras and the vehicle's electrical sys- tem. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal.

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Introduction WARNING NOTE Park Assist is an information system, NOT a Rear park assist is deactivated automati- safety system. This system is designed to cally when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine be a supplementary aid when parking the trailer wiring is used. vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judge- ment. Front park assist The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible sig- Function nal comes from the audio system's front The system is activated automatically when the speakers. vehicle is started. The indicator light in the but- It may not be possible to combine auxiliary ton in the center console illuminates. headlights and front park assist since these • The front park assist system is active from lights could trigger the system's sensors. the time the engine is started until the vehi- Front/rear park assist cle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the The park assist system is designed to assist vehicle is backing up. you when driving into parking spaces, garages, • Rear park assist is active when the engine 06 etc. It utilizes four ultrasound sensors located in one or both bumpers to measure the dis- is running and reverse gear has been selected. tance to a vehicle, object or a person who may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. Rear park assist Park assist is available in two versions: The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The signal comes Rear bumper only • from the rear speakers. • Front and rear bumpers The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park assist system's sensors.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Activating/deactivating park assist NOTE Faults in the system If the information symbol illumi- • Front park assist is disengaged auto- nates and PARK ASSIST matically when the parking brake is applied. SERVICE REQUIRED is shown on the information display, this • If the vehicle is equipped with front and indicates that the system is not rear park assist, both systems will be functioning properly and has been disengaged. deactivated by pressing the button. Consult a Volvo retailer or authorized Volvo service technician. Audible signals from the park assist system CAUTION The Park Assist system uses an intermittent In certain circumstances, the park assist tone that pulses faster as you come close to an system may give unexpected warning sig- nals that can be caused by external sound

G021267 object, and becomes constant when you are sources that use the same ultrasound fre- within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object Park Assist button (right button in the illustration) quencies as the system. This may include in front of or behind the vehicle. If the volume such things as the horns of other vehicles, The system is activated automatically when the of another source from the audio system is wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, vehicle is started. high, this will be automatically lowered. motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system. Press the Park assist button on the center If there are objects within this distance both 06 console to temporarily deactivate the sys- behind and in front of the vehicle, the signal tem(s). The indicator light in the button will alternates between front and rear speakers. go out when the system has been deacti- vated. Park assist will be automatically reactiva- ted the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will illuminate).



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 06 Starting and driving

Park assist*

Cleaning the sensors

Park assist sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them 06 with water and a suitable car washing deter- gent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warn- ing signals from the park assist system.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

06

173 174 Tire PressureMonitoringSystem Tire SealingSystem Changing awheel 191 Wheel nuts...... 190 Temporary spare...... Snow chains,snowtires, Uniform tirequality 186 Vehicle loading...... Glossary oftire 183 Tire designations...... Inflation pressure—Canadianmodels Inflation pressure—U.S.models 179 Tire inflation...... 176 General information...... terminology...... 192 ...... rdns...... 188 gradings...... 194 ...... studded tires ...... 181 ...... (TPMS)...... 182 ...... 189 ...... 199 185

G020918 WHEELS AND TIRES 07 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Introduction of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires You should replace the spare tire when you Your vehicle is equipped with tires according without the "all-season" rating. However, for replace the other road tires due to the aging of to the vehicle's tire information placard on the optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered the spare. roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on B-pillar (the structural member at the side of A tire's age can be determined by the DOT all four wheels. the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). opening), or on the inside of the fuel filler door When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration on Canadian models. are the same size designation, type (radial) and should be replaced immediately. preferably from the same manufacturer, on all CAUTION four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering Improving tire economy Some Volvo models are equipped with an the car's roadholding and handling characte- • Maintain correct tire pressure. For the tire Ultra High Performance tire and wheel com- ristics. pressure tables, see page 181. bination designed to provide maximum dry New Tires • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard pavement performance with consideration braking and tire screeching. for hydroplaning resistance. As such, they Remember that tires are per- may be more susceptible to road hazard ishable goods. As of 2000, the • Tire wear increases with speed. damage and, depending on driving condi- manufacturing week and year • Correct front wheel alignment is very tions, may achieve a tread life of less than (Department of Transporta- important. 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehi- tion (DOT) stamp) will be indi- • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy cle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD cated with 4 digits (e.g. 1502 or DSTC system, these tires are not and driving comfort. designed for winter driving, and should be means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2002). • Tires must maintain the same direction of replaced with winter tires when weather rotation throughout their lifetime. conditions dictate. Tire age • When replacing tires, the tires with the Tires degrade over time, even when they are most tread should be mounted on the rear 07 The tires have good road holding characteris- not being used. It is recommended that tires wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer tics and offer good handling on dry and wet generally be replaced after 6 years of normal during hard braking. surfaces. It should be noted however that the service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the tires have been developed to give these fea- • high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V) tires and/or wheels permanently. tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. exposure can accelerate the aging process. Certain models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree

176 07 Wheels and tires

General information

Summer and winter tires • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are WARNING unsure about the tread depth. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Storing wheels and tires are specified to meet stringent stability When storing complete wheels (tires mounted and handling requirements. Unap- on rims), they should be suspended off the proved wheel/tire size combinations floor or placed on their sides on the floor. can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- bility and handling. Approved tire sizes Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on are shown in the Tire inflation pressure their sides or standing upright, but should not tables, see page 181. be suspended. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combina- CAUTION tions will not be covered by your new Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no dry, dark place, and should never be stored responsibility for death, injury, or G020325 in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, expenses that may result from such The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the etc. installations. tire • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate Tire wear where they were mounted on the car, e.g., Tire rotation LF = left front, RR = right rear Tire wear is affected by a number of factors • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, direction are marked with an arrow on the driving style, etc. Your vehicle is driven mainly sidewall. by the front tires, which will wear faster. 07 Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's • If the tires are rotated, they should only be braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush. moved from front to back or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left. • The tires with the most tread should always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skid- However, tire rotation, done at the recom- ding). mended intervals, is one way of helping to keep



177 07 Wheels and tires

General information

tread wear as even as possible and will help Tread wear indicator you get maximum mileage from your tires. Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5, 000 km) and thereafter at 6,000 mile (10,000 km) intervals. Tire rotation should only be performed if front/ rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

NOTE Tire rotation is not included in regularly scheduled maintenance and is performed only at customer request, at additional G020323 charge. The tires have wear indicator strips running Your Volvo retailer can also provide guidance across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI based on your particular driving circumstan- are printed on the side of the tire. When ces. approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor trac- tion. 07 When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent altera- tion of the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

178 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Inflation labels Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING • Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blowout," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. • Under-inflated tires reduce the load car- rying capacity of your vehicle. G032520

G032513 When weather temperature changes occur, tire Tire inflation placard on Canadian models inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree Tire inflation placard on U.S. models temperature drop causes a corresponding NOTE Check tire inflation pressure regularly. drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check The placards shown indicate inflation pres- your tire pressures frequently and adjust them Tables listing the recommended inflation pres- sure for the tires installed on the car at the to the proper pressure, which can be found on sure for your vehicle can be found on page factory only. the vehicle's tire information placard or certifi- 181. A tire inflation pressure placard is also cation label. located on the driver's side B-pillar (the struc- Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pres- tural member at the side of the vehicle, at the sure, including the spare, at least once a month rear of the driver's door opening). This placard and before long trips. You are strongly urged 07 indicates the designation of the factory-moun- to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as auto- ted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits matic service station gauges may be inaccu- and inflation pressure. rate. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear.



179 07 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation

Checking tire pressure 2. Add air to reach the recommended air Load ratings pressure Cold tires 99 1709 lbs (755 kg) Inflation pressure should be checked when the 3. Replace the valve cap. tires are cold. 4. Repeat this procedure for each tire, includ- 102 1874 lbs (850 kg) ing the spare. The tires are considered to be cold when 104 1984 lbs (900 kg) they have the same temperature as the sur- 5. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there rounding (ambient) air. are no nails or other objects embedded 107 2150 lbs (975 kg) This temperature is normally reached after the that could puncture the tire and cause an car has been parked for at least 3 hours. air leak. Speed ratings The speed ratings in the tables translate as fol- 6. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile lows: (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregular- ities. you have to drive farther than this distance to Speed ratings pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pres- NOTE M 81 mph (130 km/h) sure when you get to the pump. • If you overfill the tire, release air by Q 100 mph (160 km/h) If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, pushing on the metal stem in the center never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires of the valve. Then recheck the pressure T 118 mph (190 km/h) are hot from driving and it is normal for pres- with your tire gauge. sures to increase above recommended cold • Some spare tires require higher inflation H 130 mph (210 km/h) pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended pressure than the other tires. Consult V 149 mph (240 km/h) cold inflation pressure could be significantly the tire inflation tables, see page 181, or see the inflation pressure placard. 07 under-inflated. W 168 mph (270 km/h) To check inflation pressure: Load ratings Y 186 mph (300 km/h) 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the Load ratings See also page 183 for an explanation of the valve. 91 1365 lbs (615 kg) designations on the sidewall of the tire.

93 1433 lbs (650 kg)

180 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—U.S. models

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard for information specific to the tires The following tire pressures are recommended installed on your vehicle at the factory. by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

Tire size Cold tire pressure up to five persons psi (kPa) Front Rear 205/55R16 91V M+S 32 (220) 32 (220)

205/50R17 93V 35 (240) 35 (240) Extra Load M+S

215/45R18A 93W 35 (240) 35 (240) Extra load

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/85R16 99M

A Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system.

07

181 07 Wheels and tires

Inflation pressure—Canadian models

Tire inflation pressure table tion placard for information specific to the tires The following tire pressures are recommended installed on your vehicle at the factory. by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire infla-

Tire size Cold tire pressures Optional pressure Up to five persons Up to three personsA psi (kPa) psi (kPa) Front Rear Front Rear 205/55R16 91V M+S 36 (250) 36 (250) 30 (210) 30 (210)

205/50R17 93V Extra Load 36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220) M+S

215/45R18 93W Extra 36 (250) 36 (250) 35 (240) 32 (220) loadB

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/85R16 99M

A Optional pressure may not be used for homologation of fuel consumption or emissions. B Tires of this type may not be mounted on vehicles equipped with the optional self-leveling system. 07

182 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Tire designations 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) M+S or M/ from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = 7 9 larger the number, the wider the tire. All Season 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" R: Radial tire. 6 8 and indicates that the tire meets all federal 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in standards. The next two numbers or letters 5 10 inches). are the plant code where it was manufac- 4 tured, the next two are the tire size code 11 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a and the last four numbers represent the load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 3 12 week and year the tire was built. For exam- 1521 lbs (690 kg). 2 ple, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum The numbers in between are marketing 1 speed at which the tire is designed to be codes used at the manufacturer's discre-

G026442 driven for extended periods of time, carry- tion. This information helps a tire manufac- ing a permissible load for the vehicle, and turer identify a tire for safety recall purpo- Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers with correct inflation pressure. For exam- ses. ple, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph place standardized information on the sidewall Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: (210 km/h). of all tires (see the illustration). Indicates the number of plies indicates or The following information is listed on the tire the number of layers of rubber-coated fab- sidewall: NOTE ric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- ufacturers also must indicate the ply mate- The tire designation: This information may not appear on the tire because it is not required by law. rials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. NOTE 07 Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum Please be aware that the following tire des- load in pounds and kilograms that can be ignation is an example only and that this carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire particular tire may not be available on your information placard located on the B-Pillar vehicle. or the driver's door for the correct tire pres- sure for your vehicle.



183 07 Wheels and tires

Tire designations

Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: See page 188 for more informa- tion. Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure: The greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. The tire suppliers may have additional mark- ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

07

184 07 Wheels and tires

Glossary of tire terminology

Terminology • B-pillar: The structural member at the side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this • Tire information placard: A placard of the vehicle behind the front door. chapter. showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be sizes, recommended inflation pressure, to the rim. cold when they have the same temperature and the maximum weight the vehicle can • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- carry. bead area and the tread. perature is normally reached after the car has been parked for at least 3 hours. • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- ber on the sidewall of each tire providing eter of the tire that contacts the road when Properly loading your vehicle will provide maxi- information about the tire brand and man- mounted on the vehicle. mum return of vehicle design performance. ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- ufacturer. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the • Inflation pressure: A measure of the tire beads are seated. amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Met- the maximum load in pounds and kilo- ric tires designed to carry a maximum load grams that can be carried by the tire. This at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. rating is established by the tire manufac- Increasing the inflation pressure beyond turer. this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. • Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure: the greatest amount of air pressure • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric that should ever be put in the tire. This limit tires designed to carry a heavier maximum is set by the tire manufacturer. load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Recommended tire inflation pressure: inflation pressure, established by Volvo, beyond this pressure will not increase the 07 tires load carrying capability. which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- inflation pressure is affected by the number sure. of occupants in the car, the amount of • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard cargo, and the speed at which the vehicle unit of air pressure. will be driven for a prolonged period. This information can be found on the tire infla- tion placard(s) located on the driver's side

185 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

Loading the vehicle Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must and passengers from XXX kilograms or with the following terms for determining your never exceed its maximum permissible weight. XXX pounds. vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 4. The resulting figure equals the available trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- amount of cargo and luggage load Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ gers. capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five tion placard: 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the NOTE amount of available cargo and luggage Curb weight • The location of the various labels in your load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5×150) The weight of the vehicle including a full tank vehicle can be found on page 266. = 650 lbs.) of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- • A table listing important weight limits for 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage your vehicle can be found on page ment. and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. 269. That weight may not safely exceed the Capacity weight available cargo and luggage load capacity All weight added to the curb weight, including calculated in Step 4. cargo and optional equipment. When towing, Steps for Determining Correct Load 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined from your trailer will be transferred to your weight. 1 weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and NOTE never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- cle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. For trailer towing information, please refer to the section "Towing a trailer", see 2. Determine the combined weight of the 07 page 162. driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Permissible axle weight The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian

1 See "Towing a trailer"

186 07 Wheels and tires

Vehicle loading

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire over- heating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehi- cle's GVW rating. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the vehicle's GVW rating limitations.

07

187 07 Wheels and tires

Uniform tire quality gradings

Uniform tire quality gradings faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C WARNING ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST may have poor traction performance. The trac- The temperature grade for this tire is estab- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY tion grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is lished for a tire that is properly inflated and REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- GRADES not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- rately or in combination, can cause heat Quality grades can be found, where appli- WARNING buildup and tire failure. cable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is example: based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering Treadwear 200 Traction AA (turning) traction. Temperature A TEMPERATURE TREADWEAR The temperature grades are AA (the highest), The treadwear grade is a comparative rating A, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance based on the wear rate of the tire when tested to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- under controlled conditions on a specified gov- sipate heat when tested under controlled con- ernment test course. For example, a tire gra- ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test ded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause times as well on the government course as a the material of the tire to degenerate and tire graded 100. The relative performance of reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can tires depends upon the actual conditions of lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre- their use, however, and many depart signifi- sponds to a minimum level of performance that cantly from the norm due to variation in driving 07 all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the habits, maintenance practices and differences Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. in road characteristics and climate. Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- TRACTION formance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur-

188 07 Wheels and tires

Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires

Snow chains CAUTION ure to do so could reduce traction to an Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with unsafe level or adversely affect handling. Check local regulations regarding the the following restrictions: • Do not mix tires of different design as this use of snow chains before installing. • could also negatively affect overall tire road Snow chains should be installed on front • • Always follow the chain manufacturer's grip. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved installation instructions carefully. Install Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads snow chains. chains as tightly as possible and • in warm weather. They should be removed If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires retighten periodically. • when the winter driving season has ended. and wheels are installed and are of a size Never exceed the chain manufacturer's • Studded tires should be run-in different than the original tires and wheels, specified maximum speed limit. (Under • 300–600 miles (500–1000 km) during chains in some cases CANNOT be used. no circumstances should you exceed which the car should be driven as smoothly Sufficient clearances between chains and 31 mph (50 km/h). brakes, suspension and body components as possible to give the studs the opportu- must be maintained. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires when driving with snow chains. should have the same rotational direction Some strap-on type chains will interfere • throughout their entire lifetime. with brake components and therefore • The handling of the vehicle can be CANNOT be used. adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well NOTE • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains as locked wheel braking. should only be installed on the front Please consult state or provincial regula- wheels. tions restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow Snow tires, studded tires chain information. Tires for winter use: • Owners who live in or regularly commute through areas with sustained periods of 07 snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-

189 07 Wheels and tires

Temporary spare

Temporary spare The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Tem- porary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the car the temporary spare tire is used. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a tem- porary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) with the "Temporary Spare" in use.

CAUTION 07 The car must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the car. The use of different size wheels can seri- ously damage your car's transmission.

1 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

190 07 Wheels and tires

Wheel nuts

Wheel nuts Steel rims – type 1 wheel nuts Steel rims are normally secured using type 1 wheel nuts, although these rims may also be secured with type 2 or 3 nuts.

WARNING Never use type 1 wheel nuts for aluminum wheels. This could cause the wheel to come loose.

Aluminum wheels – type 2 or 3 wheel nuts Only type 2 or 3 wheel nuts can be used for aluminum wheels.

NOTE Low nut. These nuts can also be used on steel High nut with a rotating washer. wheels. High nut with a fixed washer. Lockable wheel nut Three different types of wheel nuts may be If steel wheels with lockable wheel nuts are used on your vehicle, depending on whether used in combination with wheel covers, the the wheels are steel or aluminum. lockable wheel nut must be fitted to the stud nearest the air valve. The wheel cover cannot Tightening torques: 07 otherwise be installed on the wheel. • Type 1 wheel nuts: 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm) • Type 2 wheel nuts: 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm) • Type 3 wheel nuts: 96 ft. lbs. (130 Nm) • Lockable wheel nuts: 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm)

191 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

Changing a wheel G020332

G020331 Jack attachment points 5. With the car still on the ground, use the lug The spare tire, jack, and crank are located wrench to loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn 7. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be under the carpet on the floor of the trunk. by exerting downward pressure. Turn the changed is lifted off the ground. nuts counterclockwise to loosen. To change a tire: 8. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and 6. There are two jack attachment points on carefully remove the wheel so as not to 1. Apply the parking brake. each side of the car. Position the jack cor- damage the threads on the studs. 2. Put the gear selector in Park (P) or reverse rectly in the attachment (see the illustration) on models with a manual transmission. and crank while simultaneously guiding the base of the jack to the ground. The base of 07 3. Block the wheels that are on the ground the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non- with wooden blocks or large stones. slippery surface. Before raising the car, 4. Remove the wheel cover (where applica- check that the jack is still correctly posi- ble) using the lug wrench in the tool bag. tioned in the attachment.

192 07 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel

WARNING Installing the wheel WARNING 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel The jack must correctly engage the jack The jack and any tools should always be • and hub. attachment. returned to their proper storage compart- 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. ments after use to help keep them securely • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- in place in the event of sudden braking, etc. slippery surface. 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- • Never allow any part of your body to be tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross- extended under a car supported by a wise until all nuts are snug. jack. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- • Use the jack intended for the car when nately tighten the bolts crosswise to changing a tire. For any other job, use 81 ft. lbs. (110 Nm) or 96 ft. lbs. (130 Nm), stands to support the car. depending on the type of wheel/wheel nuts • Apply the parking brake and put the used on your vehicle. See also 191 for gear selector in the Park (P) position or additional information. reverse on models with a manual trans- 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). mission. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or Returning the jack to its storage space large stones. The jack (certain models) and tools should be • The jack should be kept well-greased returned to their correct storage places after and clean, and should not be damaged. use. • No objects should be placed between • On vehicles equipped with a jack and the base of jack and the ground, or spare wheel, the jack should be cranked between the jack and the attachment down and returned to its storage position 07 bar on the vehicle. after use. • On vehicles equipped with the tire sealing system, the jack should be cranked down as far as possible and returned to its stor- age position in the foam block.

193 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Introduction NOTE Tire sealing system–overview Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing The tire sealing system is only intended system* that enables you to temporarily seal a • to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, the sidewall. or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be The system consists of an air compressor, a repaired with the tire sealing system. container for the sealing compound, wiring to • After use, stow the tire sealing system connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical properly to help prevent rattling. system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. WARNING The 12-volt sockets are located in the front • After using the tire sealing system, the tunnel console and on the rear side of the tun- vehicle should not be driven farther than

nel console, in the rear seat. approximately 120 miles (200 km). G020400 Have the tire inspected by a trained and Accessing the tire sealing system • qualified Volvo service technician as Speed limit sticker The tire sealing system is stowed under the soon as possible to determine if it can On/Off switch floor of the trunk. To access it: be permanently repaired or must be 1. Lift the floor hatch in the trunk. replaced. Electrical wire 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. • The vehicle should not be driven faster Bottle holder (orange cover) than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with Protective hose cover the tire sealing system. 07 Air release knob • After using the tire sealing system, drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering Hose maneuvers and sudden stops. Bottle with sealing compound Air pressure gauge

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

WARNING • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. NOTE If irritation persists, get medical atten- Please keep the following points in mind tion. Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, when using the tire sealing system: etc.) from the tire before using the sealing system. • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol Tire sealing system–temporarily and natural rubber-latex. These sub- repairing a flat tire • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is stances are harmful if swallowed. checked and adjusted if necessary. • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be WARNING potentially harmful to the skin, the cen- • Never leave the tire sealing system tral nervous system, and the eyes. unattended when it is operating. Precautions: • Keep the tire sealing system away from • Keep out of reach of children. children. • Do not ingest the contents. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact the road and away from moving traffic. with the skin. • Apply the parking brake. • Hands should be washed thoroughly after handling. Stage 1: Sealing the hole G019723 First aid: 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it soap and water. Get medical attention stages: to the steering wheel hub where it will be if symptoms occur. clearly visible to the driver. 07 • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least sealing compound into the tire. The car is 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the then driven a short distance to distribute tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be upper and lower eyelids. Get medical the sealing compound in the tire. pressed down). attention if symptoms occur.



195 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

4. Put on the gloves included in the tire seal- 7. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- NOTE ing system. tion valve and screw the tire sealing sys- tem’s hose connector onto the valve as The air pressure gauge will temporarily tightly as possible by hand. show an increase in pressure to approxi- WARNING mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing com- Contact with the sealing compound may 8. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest pound is being pumped into the tire. The cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash 12-volt socket in the vehicle. pressure should return to a normal level the affected area immediately with soap and after approximately 30 seconds. water. 9. Start the vehicle’s engine. 10. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor 11. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to 5. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle by pressing the on/off switch to position I. between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle off the compressor briefly to get a clear of sealing compound. WARNING reading from the pressure gauge. The compressor should not be used for more Never stand next to the tire being inflated • than 10 minutes at a time to avoid over- NOTE when the compressor is in operation. heating. Do not break the seal on the bottle. This • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, occurs automatically when the bottle is switch off the compressor immediately. screwed into the holder. CAUTION • If there is visible damage to the sidewall or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The compressor should not be used for 6. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. The vehicle should not be driven if this more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. occurs. Contact a towing service or WARNING Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable. The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep WARNING 07 it securely in place and help prevent sealing If the pressure remains below 22 psi compound leakage. Once in place, the bot- (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, tle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done turn off the compressor. In this case, the by a trained and qualified Volvo service hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle technician. should not be driven.

196 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

12. Switch off the compressor and disconnect WARNING Replacing the sealing compound the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. container If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering 13. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation behavior, or noises should occur while driv- The sealing compound container must be valve and reinstall the valve cap. ing, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a replaced if: safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, 14. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- • the tire sealing system has been used to cracks, or other visible damage, and repair a tire mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the seal- is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue • the container’s expiration date has passed ing compound in the tire. driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained (see the date on decal). and qualified Volvo service technician. CAUTION NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure • After use, the sealing compound bottle, Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the 1. Connect the tire sealing system as descri- the hose, and certain other system use of the sealing compound may lead to bed in stage 1. components must be replaced. Please incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare 2. Refer to the inflation pressure tables for the consult your Volvo retailer for replace- cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. ment parts. Use the tire sealing system to check and correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- compressor. If necessary, release air from ration date has passed, please take it to the tire by turning the air release knob a Volvo retailer or a recycling station NOTE counterclockwise. that can properly dispose of harmful substances. • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be used CAUTION again to check the tire’s inflation pres- The compressor should not be used for sure. more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 07 • The empty bottle of sealing compound overheating. cannot be removed from the bottle holder. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the WARNING bottle removed and properly disposed If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 of. hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing.



197 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Sealing System

Inflating tires 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the The tire sealing system can be used to inflate gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to the tires. To do so: get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 1. Park the car in a safe place. 8. Refer to the tire inflation tables for the cor- 2. The compressor should be switched off. rect inflation pressure. If the tire needs to Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be compressor (press the on/off switch to pressed down). position I). If necessary, release air from the 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. tire by turning the air release knob coun- terclockwise. 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s infla- tion valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by CAUTION hand. The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest overheating. 12-volt socket in the vehicle. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct infla- WARNING tion pressure has been reached. • The vehicle’s engine should be running 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation when the tire sealing system is used to valve and reinstall the valve cap. avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure 07 the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the place, or outdoors, before using the sys- 12-volt socket. tem. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running.

198 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Introduction NOTE er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- The tire pressure monitoring system uses sen- sure, even if under-inflation has not reached If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure sors mounted in the tire valves to check infla- the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low warning light will flash for approximately tire pressure telltale. tion pressure levels. When the vehicle is mov- 1 minute and TIRE PRESS SYST ing at a speed of approximately 20 mph SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when inflation pressure data to a receiver located in Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the system is not operating properly. The the vehicle. should be checked monthly when cold and TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with inflated to the inflation pressure recommended the low tire pressure telltale . When the system NOTE by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will This device complies with part 15 of the vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- lowing conditions: (1) This device may not pressure label, you should determine the cause harmful interference, and (2) this proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) function indicator is illuminated, the system device must accept any interference may not be able to detect or signal low tire received, including interference that may As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may cause undesired operation. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring occur for a variety of reasons, including the system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- installation of replacement or alternate tires or sure telltale when one or more of your tires is When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when from functioning properly. Always check the will light up the tire pressure warning light the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument should stop and check your tires as soon as or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to panel and will display one of the following mes- possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- ensure that the replacement or alternate tires 07 sages in the text window: LOW TIRE PRESS. sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to CHECK TIRES or VERY LOW TIRE tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to function properly. PRESSURE. tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-



199 07 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

NOTE will erase the warning text and the warning Volvo does not recommend moving sen- light will go out. sors back and forth between sets of • TPMS indicates low tire pressure but wheels. does not replace normal tire mainte- WARNING nance. For information on correct tire NOTE pressure, please refer to the tables Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire beginning on page 181, or consult your failure, resulting in a loss of control of the • If you change to tires with a different Volvo retailer. vehicle. recommended inflation pressure, the • The tire pressure warning light will not TPMS system must be recalibrated to identify which tire is underinflated. Be Changing wheels with TPMS these tires. This must be done by an authorized Volvo retailer or workshop. sure to check all four tires. Please note the following when changing or • A certain amount of air seepage from replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- the tires occurs naturally and tire pres- tires on the vehicle: sor is moved to another wheel, the sen- sure fluctuates with seasonal changes sor's seal, nut, and valve core should be • Only the factory-mounted wheels are replaced. in temperature. Always check tire pres- equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. sure regularly. • When installing TPMS sensors, the • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary vehicle must be parked for at least spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the Erasing warning messages sensor. vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a When a low tire pressure warning message has • If wheels without TPMS sensors are moun- TPMS error message will be displayed. been displayed, and the tire pressure warning ted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST light has come on: SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed CAUTION 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the each time the vehicle is driven above inflation pressure of all four tires. 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the 07 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not reappear. valve to help avoid bending or otherwise (consult the tire pressure placard or the If the message is still displayed, drive the damaging the valve. tables, see page 181 ). vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a message. speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle.

200 07 Wheels and tires

07

201 202 an oc p...... 208 Paint touchup...... 204 Washing andcleaningthecar......

G020920 CAR CARE 08 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Washing the car considerably and also helps prolong the CAUTION The following points should be kept in mind service life of the wiper blades. Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rub- when washing and cleaning the car: Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel • • ber components housings, fenders, etc). • The car should be washed at regular inter- Polishing chromed strips can wear In areas of high industrial fallout, more fre- • vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • away or damage the surface adhere to the paint and may cause dam- quent washing is recommended. age. To help prevent corrosion, it is partic- • Polishes containing abrasive sub- ularly important to wash the car frequently NOTE stances should not be used in the wintertime when salt has been used When washing the car, remember to remove on the roads. dirt from the drain holes in the doors and CAUTION • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. sills. Doing so may cause detergents and wax • During high pressure washing, the to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid spray mouthpiece must never be closer scratching, use lukewarm water to soften Exterior components to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not the dirt before you wash with a soft Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning spray into the locks. sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. products, available at your Volvo retailer, for • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental reduce lighting capacity considerably. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork components such as chromed strips on the as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish Clean the headlights regularly, for exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for may be permanently damaged. example when refueling. using these products should be followed care- Special moonroof cautions: • A detergent can be used to facilitate the fully. Solvents or stain removers should not be softening of dirt and oil. used. • Always close the moonroof* and sun • Dry the car with a clean chamois and shade before washing your vehicle. remember to clean the drain holes in the • Never use wax on the rubber seals doors and rocker panels. around the moonroof. • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on after the car has been washed. the moonroof. • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy • 08 water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- shield and wiper blades improves visibility

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Automatic washing – simple and quick WARNING • Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- We do NOT recommend washing your car in an ishing a dull surface. When the car is driven immediately after automatic wash during the first six months • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can being washed, apply the brakes several • (because the paint will not have hardened suf- be purchased today. These waxes are easy times in order to remove any moisture ficiently). to use and produce a long-lasting, high- from the brake linings. gloss finish that protects the bodywork An automatic wash is a simple and quick way • Engine cleaning agents should not be against oxidation, road dirt and fading. to clean your car, but it is worth remembering used when the engine is warm. This Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct that it may not be as thorough as when you constitutes a fire risk. • yourself go over the car with sponge and water. sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should Keeping the underbody clean is most impor- not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). tant, especially in the winter. Some automatic Exterior lighting washers do not have facilities for washing the Condensation may form temporarily on the CAUTION inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as underbody. Volvo does not recommend the use of long- headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor- life or durable paint protection coatings, CAUTION mal and the lights are designed to withstand some of which may claim to prevent pitting, moisture. Normally, condensation will dissi- fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have • Before driving into an automatic car pate after the lights have been on for a short not been tested by Volvo for compatibility wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to time. with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them avoid damaging the windshield wipers. may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, Make sure that side view mirrors, auxil- Polishing and Waxing or cloud. Damage caused by application of • paint protection coatings may not be cov- iary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any • Normally, polishing is not required during ered under your vehicle's paint warranty. antenna(s) are retracted or removed. the first year after delivery, however, wax- Otherwise there is risk of the machine ing may be beneficial. dislodging them • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- must be washed and dried. Tar spots can plated wheels using the same deter- be removed with kerosene or tar remover. gents used for the body of the vehicle. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can compound. permanently stain chrome-plated • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. 08 wheels. • Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax.



205 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Upholstery care Volvo also offers a special leather softener that This will help the leather resist staining and should be applied after the cleaner and pro- protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. Fabric tectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For reduces friction between leather and other fin- CAUTION more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, ishes in the vehicle. shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric • Under no circumstances should gaso- stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four be used on the plastic or the leather Interior plastic components times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about since these can cause damage. Cleaning interior plastic components should Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- • Take extra care when removing stains be done with a cleaning agent specially ener 943 7429. such as ink or lipstick since the coloring designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo Cleaning leather upholstery can spread. retailer. 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- Alcantera™ suede-like material and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. vent can damage the seat padding. Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the • Start from the outside of the stain and soft cloth and mild soap solution. sponge with circular movements. work toward the center. Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the • Leather care pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured may damage the textile upholstery. with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, do not rub. • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a new jeans or suede garments, may stain protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and towel, and allow the leather to dry com- the upholstery. fading can result. pletely. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy Protecting leather upholstery leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner to the upholstery with light circular move- removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream ments. 08 protectant restores a barrier against soil and 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. sunlight.

206 08 Car care

Washing and cleaning the car

Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution.

Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo rec- ommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

08

207 08 Car care

Paint touch up

Touching up minor paint damage Minor stone chips and scratches NOTE Paint damage requires immediate attention to Material: When touching up the vehicle, it should be avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish • Primer – can clean and dry. The surface temperature regularly - when washing the vehicle for should be above 60° F (15° C). instance. Touch-up if necessary. • Paint – touch-up pen Brush If the stone chip has not penetrated down Paint repairs require special equipment and • to the metal and an undamaged layer of skill. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo • Masking tape paint remains, the touch-up paint can be service technician for any extensive damage. applied as soon as the spot has been Minor scratches can be repaired by using cleaned. Volvo touch-up paint. Deep scratches Color code 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each applica-

G020345 tion. 3. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off. G031024

08 When ordering touch-up paint from your Volvo retailer, make sure you have the right color. Use the paint code indicated on the model plate (1 in the illustration).

208 08 Car care

08

209 210 ue...... 231 Fuses...... Replacing bulbs 222 Battery...... Wiper blades 219 Fluids...... 217 Engine oil...... 216 Engine compartment...... 215 Hood...... Maintaining yourcar 212 Volvo maintenance...... 221 ...... 224 ...... 213 ......

G020922 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 09 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Volvo maintenance

General Maintenance Service Records Information booklet for Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections detailed information concerning each of the program outlined in the Warranty and Service before it was delivered to you, in accordance warranties. Records Information booklet. This mainte- with Volvo specifications. The maintenance nance program contains inspections and serv- procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- Periodic maintenance helps minimize ices necessary for the proper function of your ice Records Information booklet, many of emissions vehicle. The maintenance services contain which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehi- several checks that require special tools and sions, should be performed as indicated. It is cle running well. Your Warranty and Service training, and therefore must be performed by a recommended that receipts for vehicle emis- Records Information booklet provides a com- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top sion maintenance be retained in case ques- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up condition, specify time-tested and proven tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle main- Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. tion and maintenance should also be per- tenance. The schedule includes components formed anytime a malfunction is observed or that affect vehicle emissions. This page The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S suspected. describes some of the emission-related com- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle ponents. manufacturers to furnish written instructions to Applicable warranties – U.S/Canada the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- servicing and function of the components that dian regulations, the following list of warranties control emissions. These services, which are is provided. listed in the "Warranty and Service Records • New Vehicle Limited Warranty Information" booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will be required to pay for labor • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty and material used. • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Sys- tems Limited Warranty • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • Emission Performance Warranty These are the federal warranties; other warran- ties are provided as required by state/provin- cial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and

212 09 Maintenance and servicing

Maintaining your car 09

Owner maintenance As needed: If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- • Wash the car, including the undercarriage, two jack attachments points should be used. vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty to reduce wear that can be caused by a They are specially reinforced to bear the weight and Service Records Information booklet. buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed caused by salt residues. under the front of the engine support frame. The following points can be carried out Clean leaves and twigs from air intake Take care not to damage the splash guard between the normally scheduled maintenance • vents at the base of the windshield, and under the engine. Ensure that the jack is posi- services. from other places where they may collect. tioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Each time the car is refueled: Always use axle stands or similar structures. • Check the engine oil level. NOTE If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, Complete service information for qualified front and rear lift arm pads should be centered headlights, and taillights. technicians is available online for purchase under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. edge of the sill rail (see illustration). Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect Emission inspection readiness the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle • Check that engine coolant and other fluid What is an Onboard Diagnostic System levels are between the indicated "min" and (OBD II)? "max" markings. OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass engine management system. It stores diagnos- cleaner and soft paper towels. tic information about your vehicle's emission • Wipe driver information displays with a soft controls. It can light the Check Engine light cloth. (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • performing within an expected range. A fault rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter- may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will minal connector, or a battery near the end store a message about any fault. of its useful service life. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for additional information.



213 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Maintaining your car

How Do States Use OBD II for Emission your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, Inspections? serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. Many states connect a computer directly to a • If you recently had service for a lit Check vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Engine light, or if you had service that then read "faults." In some states, this type of required disconnecting the battery, a inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission period of driving is necessary to bring the test. OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high- How Can My Vehicle Fail OBD II Emission way driving is typically needed to allow Inspection? OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- retailer can provide you with more infor- tion for any of the following reasons. mation on planning a trip. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with vehicle may fail inspection. your vehicle's maintenance schedule. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required dis- connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How Can I Prepare for My Next OBD II Emission Inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have

214 09 Maintenance and servicing

Hood 09

Opening the hood G031032

To open the hood: 1. Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. 2. Lift the hood slightly. 3. Press up the release control located under the front edge of the hood (at the center) up to the right, and lift the hood.

WARNING Check that the hood locks engage properly when closed.

215 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Engine compartment G026456

Cooling system expansion tank Relay/fuse box Power steering fluid reservoir (concealed Air cleaner behind the headlight) Dipstick – engine oil WARNING Radiator The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine Cooling fan has been switched off. Washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake/clutch fluid reservoir Battery

216 09 Maintenance and servicing

Engine oil 09

Changing engine oil and oil filter See page 273 for oil specifications. Refer to the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change inter- vals. Volvo recommends Castrol.

NOTE • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance G020338 G020336 intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult a Location of dipstick and oil filler cap trained and qualified Volvo service tech- CAUTION nician. Checking the oil 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lint- • Not checking the oil level regularly can free rag. result in serious engine damage if the oil Checking and adding oil level becomes too low. The oil level should be checked at regular inter- 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check Oil that is lower than the specified qual- vals, particularly during the period up to the the oil level. • ity can damage the engine. first scheduled maintenance service. 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to Always add oil of the same type and the MIN mark, add approximately • • The car should be parked on a level surface viscosity as already used. when the oil is checked. 1 US quart (1 liter) of oil. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This • If the engine is warm, wait for at least 4. Run the engine until it reaches normal could cause an increase in oil consump- 10–15 minutes after the engine has been operating temperature. tion. switched off before checking the oil. 5. Switch off the engine and wait for at least 10–15 minutes and recheck the oil level. If necessary, add oil until the level is near the MAX mark. 

217 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Engine oil

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces

NOTE Volvo uses different systems to indicate a low oil level or pressure. Some models have an oil pressure sensor, in which case a warning symbol (see page 58) is used to indicate low oil pressure. Other models have an oil level sensor, in which case the driver is alerted by the warning symbol in the cen- ter of the instrument panel and a text in the information display. Some models use both systems. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer for more information.

218 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fluids 09

Washer fluid Coolant CAUTION • If necessary, top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and anti- freeze). • Different types of antifreeze/coolant may not be mixed. • If the cooling system is drained, it should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/anti- freeze. • The cooling system must always be

G026425 G020334 kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and Washer fluid reservoir Coolant reservoir MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there The washer fluid reservoir is located in the Normally, the coolant does not need to be can be high local temperatures in the engine compartment and holds approximately changed. If the system must be drained, con- engine which could result in damage. 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters). During cold weather, the sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- Check coolant regularly! reservoir should be filled with windshield nician. • Do not top up with water only. This washer solvent containing antifreeze. reduces the rust-protective and anti- freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicles cooling system.



219 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fluids

WARNING (280 °C), P/N 9437433 Power steering fluid The fluid level is checked at each service inter- Never remove the radiator cap while the Replace: The fluid should be replaced accord- engine is warm. Wait until the vehicle cools. ing to the intervals specified in the Warranty val. and Service Records Information booklet. If it is necessary to top off the coolant when Fluid type: Volvo power steering fluid or equiv- the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion When driving under extremely hard conditions alent. tank cap slowly so that the overpressure (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to Replace: No fluid change required. dissipates. replace the fluid more often. Consult your Volvo retailer. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo serv- WARNING Brake fluid ice technician. If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no elec- WARNING trical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in mind that greater effort will be required to in the reservoir or if a brake-related turn the steering wheel. message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid. G020333

Brake fluid reservoir The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reser- voir. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F

220 09 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades 09

Replacing windshield wiper blades Keeping the windshield wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the serv- ice life of the wiper blades. See page 204 for washing instructions. G020330

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Press the button on the wiper blade attach- ment and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm. 3. Press a new wiper blade (2) until it clicks into place. 4. Ensure the blade is securely attached (3). 5. Fold in the wiper arm. The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the one on the passenger's side. G020329

221 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Battery

Battery maintenance • To help keep the battery in good condition, Battery symbols Driving habits and conditions, climate, the the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 Wear protection goggles number of starts, etc., all affect the service life minutes a week or connected to a charger and function of the battery. In order for your with an automatic charging function. battery to perform satisfactorily, keep the fol- • If the battery is fully discharged a number lowing in mind: of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps Check the fluid level in each cell in the battery prolong its service life. every 24 months or every 15,0001 miles See owner's manual for The service life of a battery is affected by (24,000 km), whichever is sooner. • factors such as driving conditions and cli- details • Use a screw driver to open the caps or mate. Extreme cold may also further cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • If necessary, add distilled water. The level • Because the battery’s starting capacity should never be above the indicator. decreases with time, it may be necessary • The fluid level should be checked if the to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for Keep away from children battery has been recharged. an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in • place. • Check that the battery cables are correctly WARNING connected and properly tightened. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Corrosive • Never disconnect the battery when the Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- engine is running, or when the key is in the sories contain lead and lead compounds, ignition. This could damage the vehicle's chemicals known to the state of California electrical system. to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. • The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery.

1 More frequently in warm climates.

222 09 Maintenance and servicing

Battery 09

No smoking, no open flames, 7. Release the clamp holding the battery. no sparks 8. Lift out the battery.

Installing a new battery 1. Put the battery in place in the engine com- partment. Explosion 2. Install the battery's retaining clamp. 3. Reinstall the front side of the battery box. 4. Connect the positive cable. 5. Connect the ground cable. 6. Reinstall the cover over the battery.

Battery replacement NOTE Removing the battery Used batteries should be properly disposed 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the key. of at a recycling station or similar facility, or taken to your Volvo retailer. 2. Wait at least 5 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the bat- tery so that all information in the vehicle's WARNING electrical system can be stored in the con- Never expose the battery to open flame trol modules. • or electric spark. 3. Remove the cover over the battery. • Do not smoke near the battery. 4. Disconnect the battery negative (ground) • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do cable. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, 5. Disconnect the positive cable. skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If con- tact occurs, flush the affected area 6. Remove the front side of the battery box immediately with water. Obtain medical with a screwdriver. help immediately if eyes are affected.

223 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

Introduction Removing the headlight housing light, turn signal, and side marker bulbs. To lift Before replacing bulbs in your vehicle, please out the housing: keep the following points in mind: WARNING 1. Remove the key from the ignition and turn • The engine should not be running when the headlight switch to position . NOTE changing bulbs. 2. Open the hood. Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fin- • When changing in the headlight hous- gers. Grease and oils from your fingers ing, if the engine has been running just 3. Pull up the headlight housing's retaining vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit prior to replacing bulbs, please be pin. on the reflector, which will damage it. aware that components in the engine 4. Pull out the headlight housing. The optional Active Bending Light bulbs compartment will be hot. contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian. Certain bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cian: • Courtesylighting • Reading lights • Glove compartment lights • Turn signals and courtesy lights in the side door mirrors • Brake lights G019600

Active Bending Lights, Brake lights G019599 • 5. Disconnect the wiring connector by press- ing down the clip with your thumb while at The entire headlight housing must be lifted out the same time pulling the connector with when replacing the high/low beam, parking your other hand.

224 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

6. Lift out the headlight housing and place it Low beam bulb on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

CAUTION When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring.

After the defective bulb has been replaced, reinsert the housing in the reverse order. Check that the retaining pin is correctly inserted.

WARNING G019133

Active Bending Lights* – due to the high G019131 Low beam bulb voltage used by these headlights, these Cover with retaining clamps bulbs should only be replaced by a trained Installing a new bulb and qualified Volvo service technician. 1. Open the hood and remove the headlight 1. Insert the new bulb. It can only be installed housing (see page 224 for instructions). in one position. 2. Release the retaining clamps on the cover. 2. Press the retaining spring inward and 3. Release the bulb's retaining spring holding upward and slightly to the right until it the bulb in place by pressing it inward and snaps into place. downward. 3. Press the wiring connector onto the bulb.

4. Pull out the bulb. 4. Put the plastic cover in place. 5. Press the retaining clamps back into place. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing (see page 224).



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

High beam bulb (halogen) WARNING Parking light bulb Active Bending Lights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, the Active Bending Light bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

4. Driver's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise. Passenger's side headlight: Turn the bulb holder clockwise. 5. Pull out the bulb holder and replace the bulb. G019136 G019145 6. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be Halogen high beam bulb installed in one position. 1. Open the hood. 1. Open the hood. 7. Reinstall the cover on the upper side of the 2. Remove the headlight housing, see 2. Remove the headlight housing (see headlight housing by turning it clockwise. page 224. page 224). 8. Reinstall the headlight housing (see 3. Remove the cover on the upper side of the 3. Remove the cover on the upper side of the page 224). headlight housing by turning it counter- headlight housing by turning it counter- clockwise. clockwise. 4. Pull out the bulb holder. NOTE 5. Replace the bulb. The halogen high beam bulb has a different 6. Press the bulb holder back into position. It socket on vehicles equipped with the will click into place. optional Active Bending Lights. On these models, pull the bulb straight out. 7. Reinstall the cover on the upper side of the headlight housing by turning it clockwise. 8. Reinstall the headlight housing.

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

Turn signal Side marker light Front fog lights* G019150 G018050 G017609

1. Open the hood. 1. Open the hood. 1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to position 0. 2. Remove the headlight housing, see 2. Remove the headlight housing, see page 224. page 224. 2. Remove the panel around the fog light housing by inserting a screw driver as 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise, shown in the illustration and pressing the remove it. pull it out, and replace the bulb. panel outward to release the retaining clip. 4. Remove the bulb from the holder by press- 4. Reinstall the bulb holder. It can only be 3. Grasp the edge of the panel and pull it ing it in and twisting it counterclockwise. installed in one position. straight out. 5. Insert a new bulb and reinstall the bulb 5. Reinstall the headlight housing. 4. Unscrew the screw in the fog light housing holder in the headlight housing. and remove it. 6. Reinstall the headlight housing. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

6. Insert a new bulb by turning it clockwise 2. Remove the covers in the left/right panels Brake light (LED)1 (the profile on the bulb holder will corre- to access the bulb holders. spond with the profile in the base of the Taillight 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb). affected bulb holder. Parking light 7. Reinsert the bulb holder. The mark TOP 4. Press the catches together and pull out the Fog light should be upward. bulb holder. Turn signal 5. Replace the defective bulb. Removing the taillight bulb holder Back-up light 6. Press the bulb holder into place and rein- stall the cover. NOTE Location of taillight bulbs If the message indicating a burned out bulb remains in the information display after the bulb has been replaced, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

High-level brake light These bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. G020916

All bulbs in the taillight cluster can be replaced from the trunk. To access the bulb holders:

1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to G018055 position 0. Location of taillight bulbs

1 The wiring to the LED brake lights is permanently connected to the bulb holder. It should not be removed.

228 09 Maintenance and servicing

Replacing bulbs 09

License plate lighting Footwell lighting Trunk lighting G014843 G020795 G020915

1. Switch off all lights and turn the key to The footwell lighting is located under the dash- 1. Insert a screwdriver and turn it gently to position 0. board on the driver's and passenger's sides. detach the bulb housing. To replace a bulb: 2. Remove the screws with a screw driver. 2. Remove the defective bulb. 1. Insert a screwdriver under the edge of the 3. Detach the entire bulb housing and care- 3. Install a new bulb. lens. Turn the screwdriver gently to detach fully pull it out. Turn the connector coun- the lens. 4. Press the bulb housing back into place. terclockwise and pull out the bulb. 2. Remove the defective bulb. 4. Replace the defective bulb. 3. Install a new bulb. 5. Reinstall the connector and turn it clock- wise. 4. Press the lens back into place. 6. Reinstall the entire bulb housing and screw it into place.



229 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Replacing bulbs

Vanity mirror lighting 6. Press the three lower lugs back into place. G020253

1. Insert a screwdriver under the center of the lower edge of the mirror, turn it, and care- fully pry up the lugs at the edge. 2. Move the screwdriver under the edge on the left and right-hand sides (near the black rubber sections) and pry carefully to release the lower edge of the mirror. 3. Pry carefully and lift out the entire mirror and the cover. 4. Remove the defective bulb and replace it with a new one. 5. To reinstall the mirror, begin by pressing the three lugs at the upper edge of the mir- ror back into place.

230 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Replacing fuses There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment and the passenger com- partment. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, special fuse removal tools are located on the inside of the fuse box cov- ers. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the follow- ing pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system.



231 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuse box in the engine compartment G007446

The fuse box in the engine compartment has positions for 36 fuses. • Fuses 1–18 are relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by an authorized Volvo service technician. • Fuses 19–36 may be changed at any time when necessary. Several extra fuses and a fuse removal tool to assist in removing/replacing fuses can be found on the underside of the fuse box cover in the engine compartment.

232 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuses in the engine compartment G020250

1. Coolant fan (radiator) 50A 9. Engine functions 30A 17. Windshield wipers 30A

2. Power steering 80A 10. Climate system blower 40A 18. Feed to passenger com- 40A partment fuse box 3. Feed to passenger com- 60A 11. Headlight washers 20A partment fuse box 19. Not in use 12. Feed to heated rear window 30A 4. Feed to passenger com- 60A 20. Horn 15A partment fuse box 13. Starter motor relay 30A 21. Not in use 5. Element, climate unit 80A 14. Trailer connector (acces- 40A sory) 22. Not in use 6. Not in use 15. Not in use 23. Engine control module 10A 7. ABS pump 30A (ECM)/transmission control 16. Feed to audio system 30A module (TCM) 8. ABS valves 20A



233 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

24. Not in use

25. Not in use

26. Ignition switch 15A

27. A/C compressor 10A

28. Not in use

29. Front fog lights* 15A

30. Not in use

31. Not in use

32. Fuel injectors 10A

33. Heated oxygen sensor, vac- 20A uum pump

34. Ignition coils, climate unit 10A pressure sensor

35. Engine sensor valves, A/C 15A relay, relay coil, PTC ele- ment oil trap, canister, mass air meter

36. Engine control module 10A (ECM), throttle sensor

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

Fuse box in the passenger compartment G020601

The fuse box in the passenger compartment is 6. Pull the center pins fully out of the mount- located under the glove compartment. ing clips, secure the upholstery with the mounting clips and press the pins into the To access the fuses: mounting clips again. The mounting clips 1. Remove the upholstery covering the fuse then expand, holding the upholstery in box by first pressing in the center pins in position. the mounting clips approximately 0.5 in (1 cm) with a small screwdriver and then pulling the pins out. 2. Turn both retaining screws (2) counter- clockwise until they release. 3. Fold down the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it toward the seat until it stops. Fold it down completely. The fuse box can be unhooked completely. 4. Replace the blown fuse. 5. Close the fuse box in reverse order.



235 09 Maintenance and servicing

09 Fuses

Fuses in the passenger compartment

- Fuse 37-42, not in use - 47. Interior lighting 5A 54. Park assist*, Active Bending 10A Lights* 43. Audio system, Blue- 15A 48. Windshield washers 15A tooth,Volvo Navigation sys- 55. Not in use tem* 49. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A tem (SRS), Occupant 56. Volvo Navigation System 10A 44. Supplemental Restrain Sys- 10A Weight Sensor (OWS) remote key module, alarm tem (SRS), engine control siren control module module 50. Not in use 57. On-board diagnostic 15A 45. 12-volt socket in rear seat 15A 51. AWD, fuel filter relay 10A socket, brake light switch

46. Lighting – glove compart- 5A 52. Transmission control mod- 5A 58. Right high beam, auxiliary 7.5A ment, instrument panel, and ule (TCM), ABS lights relay footwells 53. Power steering 10A 59. Left high beam 7.5A

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses 09

60. Heated driver's seat* 15A 75. Not in use

61. Heated passenger's seat* 15A 76. Not in use

62. Moonroof* 20A 77. Auxiliary equipment control 15A module (AEM) 63. Power window and door 20A lock – rear passenger's side 78. Not in use door 79. Back-up lights 5A 64. Audio system, Volvo Navi- 5A gation system* 80. Not in use

65. Audio system 5A 81. Power window and door 20A lock – rear driver's side door 66. Audio system control mod- 10A ule (ICM), climate system 82. Power window – front pas- 25A senger's side door 67. Not in use 83. Power window and door 25A 68. Cruise control 5A lock – front driver's side door 69. Climate system, rain sen- 5A sor*, BLIS button* 84. Power passenger's seat 25A

70. Not in use 85. Power driver's seat 25A

71. Not in use 86. Interior lighting relay, trunk 5A lighting, power seats 72. Not in use

73. Moonroof, front ceiling 5A lighting, auto-dim mirror*, seat belt reminder

74. Fuel pump relay 15A

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 238 Bluetooth 257 Audio menu...... CD player/CDchanger Radio functions Audio functions ® hands-freeconnection...... 240 ...... 245 ...... 253 ...... 258 ......

G020924 AUDIO 10 10 Audio

Audio functions

Audio system controls AUX The AUX (auxiliary) port, located under the cen- 10 ter armrest, can be used to connect for exam- ple, an MP3 player. If the player is being charged through a 12-volt socket while it is connect to the AUX port, sound quality may be impaired. The volume of the external sound source AUX may be different from the volume of the internal sound sources such as the CD player or the radio. If the external sound source's volume is too high, the quality of the sound may be impaired.

G026347 Auxiliary connector This can be prevented by adjusting the external sound source's input volume. VOLUME dial AUX port 1. While playing the radio or a CD, lower the USB connector* AM/FM – select a radio band audio volume to about one-quarter. MODE – select a sound source Selecting a sound source 2. Switch to AUX mode on the audio system Press AM/FM (2) repeatedly to toggle by pressing the MODE button. TUNING dial between FM1, FM2, and AM. 3. Connect the headphone output from your SOUND button Press MODE (3) repeatedly to toggle music player to the AUX input using a cable between the CD player and the optional with a stereo 3.5 mm miniplug at both external sound source AUX, USB or the ends. optional Sirius satellite radio. 4. Set your music player's headphone vol- The currently selected sound source will be ume to three-quarters using the player's shown in the display. volume controls.

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Audio

Audio functions

5. Press MENU on the audio system, and Steering wheel keypad USB/iPodŸ connector* navigate to AUX volumeor AUX input volume. 10 6. Turn the volume knob to raise or lower the AUX input volume until you hear music at a comfortable level. 7. If there is distortion, lower your music play- er's headphone volume until the distortion goes away. 8. Finally, exit the menu and adjust the audio volume to a comfortable level.

Volume

Use the volume dial (1) or the buttons in the G026424 steering wheel keypad to adjust the volume Steering wheel keypad level. The volume level is also adjusted auto- An auxiliary device, such as an iPodŸ, MP3 matically according to the vehicle's speed, see The four buttons on the steering wheel keypad player or a USB flash drive can be connected page 244 for more information on this func- can be used to control the audio system. The to the audio system via the connector in the tion. steering wheel keypad can be used to adjust center console storage compartment. A stand- volume, shift between preset stations and ard cable from an iPodŸ or MP3 player can be change CD tracks. Press one of the two left- routed under the cover to the AUX connector hand buttons briefly to change to the next/pre- in the storage compartment. vious preset radio station, or to go to the next/ previous track on a CD. Press and hold down A sound source must be chosen, depending on these buttons to search within a track on a CD. the device that has been connected: 1. Use to select or . The text Daytime/twilight display MODE iPod USB Connect device will be displayed. In daylight the information is displayed against a light background. In darkness it is displayed 2. Connect the device to the connector in the against a dark background. center console storage compartment (see the illustration).



* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 10 Audio

Audio functions

The text LOADING will be displayed while the NOTE iPodŸ system loads the files (folder structure) on the An iPodŸ receives current and its battery is The system supports playback of files in the 10 device. This may take a short time. charged through the connecting cord. How- most common versions of formats such as When information about the files (the folder mp3, wma, and wav. However, there may be ever, if the iPod's battery is completely structure) on the device has been loaded, the versions of these formats that the system drained, it should be recharged before the resulting list includes information on the artist, does not support. iPodŸ is connected to the audio system. genre and song title. The system also supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. NOTE To navigate in the folder structure, press Ÿ iPodŸ Shuffle is not supported. ENTER and scroll up and down the folders When an iPodŸ is used as a sound source, using the arrow buttons (on the audio system the vehicle's audio system has a menu control panel or on the steering wheel keypad). USB flash drive structure similar to the one in the iPodŸ. See the iPod's manual for detailed information. Press the right arrow button to select a folder. To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is Press the left arrow button to go up a level in advisable to only store music files on the drive. the folder structure. Press ENTER to go down It will take considerably longer for the system For further information, refer to the accessory a level in the folder structure. to index the files on the drive if it contains any- manual USB/iPodŸ Music Interface. thing other than compatible music files. Tracks can be selected in two ways: Sound settings Turn the Tuning knob (no. 4 in the illustra- NOTE Optimal sound reproduction tion on page 245) clockwise or counter- The system supports removable media that clockwise. uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 The audio system is calibrated for optimal sound reproduction through the use of digital file system and can index up to 500 folders Use the right or left arrow keys on the nav- and a maximum of 64,000 files. The device signal processing. This calibration takes into igation control (no. 5 in the illustration on must have at least 256 Mb of memory. account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acous- page 245) to select the desired track. The tics, the seating position of the listener, etc., for arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad each combination of vehicle and audio system. can also be used in the same way. MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system There is also dynamic calibration that takes that is not supported by the vehicle's audio into account the setting of the volume control, system. In order to use an MP3 player, the sys- radio reception, and the vehicle's speed. The tem must be set to USB Removable device/ sound settings described in this manual, such Mass Storage Device. as BASS, TREBLE, and Equalizer front…/

242 10 Audio

Audio functions

Equalizer rear… are only intended to enable Surround sound 3. Select Surround SURROUND AM/ the user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her Surround sound settings are used to SURROUND FM/SURROUND CD/ personal preferences. balance sound levels throughout the SURROUND AUX and press ENTER. 10 vehicle. Surround settings for the var- 1. Press SOUND (5). Press this button G021216 4. Select Dolby Pro Logic II, 3-channel ious sound sources are made sepa- repeatedly until you come to the setting stereo or Off and press ENTER. that you wish to change. rately. Equalizer Front/Rear 2. Turn the dial (4) to make the TUNING NOTE This function is used to fine-tune the sound desired setting. • Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is only level for different frequencies separately. The following settings can be made: available on the Premium Sound sys- BASS–set the bass level tem. NOTE TREBLE–set the treble level • When listening to FM radio stations, This function is only available on certain Dolby Surround Pro Logic II functions sound systems. BALANCE–set the left/right sound balance best in areas with strong reception. If reception is weak, selecting 2 or 3- FADER–set the front/rear sound balance To adjust the equalizer settings: channel stereo may provide better Subwoofer (accessory)–set the level for the sound quality. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. subwoofer (bass speaker) 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and CENTER–make settings for the center speaker The Dolby symbol will be appear in the display press ENTER. when Dolby Pro Logic II is activated. SURROUND–make settings for surround 3. Select Equalizer front…/Equalizer sound There are three alternative settings: rear… and press ENTER. Pro Logic II Subwoofer (accessory) • The column in the display indicates the sound To switch the subwoofer on or off: • 3-channel level for the current frequency. Off (normal 2-channel stereo) Adjust the level with the TUNING dial (4), 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. • • or use the Up/Down arrows. Additional fre- 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS and press Activating/deactivating Surround sound quencies can be selected with the Right/ ENTER. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. Left arrows. 3. Select SUBWOOFER and press ENTER. 2. Select SUBWOOFER in the menu and • Save the settings by pressing ENTER or press ENTER. exit without saving by pressing EXIT.



243 10 Audio

Audio functions

Automatic sound control The audio system's volume is adjusted auto- 10 matically according to the speed of the vehicle. There are three settings available, which deter- mine the level of volume compensation: • Low • Medium1 • High To set the automatic sound level: 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. 2. Select AUDIO SETTINGS in the menu and press ENTER. 3. Select Auto. volume control… in the menu and press ENTER. 4. Select Low, Medium, or High and press ENTER.

1 Default setting.

244 10 Audio

Radio functions

Radio function controls EXIT–press to cancel a menu selection or Storing preset stations a selected function Manually storing a station 10 AUTO–search for and store the strongest 1. Tune to the desired station. radio stations in the area in which you are driving 2. Press and hold the preset button under which the station is to be stored. The audio Searching for stations system sound will be interrupted for a few There are two ways to manually tune a radio seconds and Station stored will appear in station: the display. Turn the TUNING dial (3) to the desired fre- quency. NOTE Press the left or right arrow key on the A total of 30 stations can be stored; 10 sta- menu navigation control and hold it down. tions each in AM, FM1 and FM2.

G026366 The radio scans slowly in the selected direction and will increase the scanning Automatically storing a station AM/FM1/FM2 selection speed after a few seconds. Release the Pressing AUTO (7) automatically searches for button when the desired frequency and stores up to ten strong AM or FM stations Station preset buttons appears in the display. in a separate memory. If more than ten stations TUNING dial for selecting radio stations The frequency can be fine-tuned by short are found, the ten strongest ones are stored. presses on the left/right arrow keys. This function is especially useful in areas in SCAN which you are not familiar with radio stations or MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press their frequencies. the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a To use the AUTO function: menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of the control to search for or change radio 1. Select a waveband using the AM/FM but- stations/CD tracks ton (1). 2. Start the search by pressing AUTO until Autostoring appears in the display. When the search is completed, Autostoring will no longer be displayed. If there are no sta- 

245 10 Audio

Radio functions

tions with sufficient signal strength, No AST The radio will then exit auto-store mode and The SCAN function will be deactivated and the found is displayed. the stored station can be selected by pressing station can be selected by pressing the preset 10 the preset button. button. The auto-stored stations can be selected using the preset buttons (2). Scanning Radio text Press EXIT (6) to terminate the automatic storing function. SCAN (4) automatically searches through the Certain stations broadcast program informa- selected waveband for strong AM or FM sta- tion, which can be shown in the display. When the radio is in auto-store mode, Auto is tions. When the radio finds a station, that sta- To start this function: shown in the display. Auto disappears when tion will be played for approximately 8 sec- you return to normal radio mode, which can be onds, after which scanning resumes. 1. Select FM1 or FM2 and press the MENU done by briefly pressing AM/FM (1), EXIT (6), button. or AUTO (7). Activating/deactivating SCAN 2. Press ENTER. 1. Select radio mode using the AM/FM but- To return to the Auto-store mode, press the ton (2). 3. Select Radio text in the menu and press AUTO button briefly and select a stored station ENTER. by pressing one of the preset buttons (2). 2. Press SCAN to activate the function. SCAN is shown in the display. To deactivate this function, select Radio text Saving auto-stored stations in the preset again and press ENTER. memory 3. Press the SCAN or EXIT button to deacti- vate the scan function and listen to the An auto-stored station can be saved in the selected station. memory for manually preset stations. 1. Press AUTO (7) briefly. Storing a station found with SCAN > Auto is displayed. A station can be stored as a preset while the SCAN function is activated. 2. Press one of the preset buttons (2) under which the station is to be stored. Hold Press one of the preset buttons (2) under down the button until Station stored is which the station is to be stored. Hold displayed. down the button until Station stored is displayed.

246 10 Audio

Radio functions

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" HD Radio reception (U.S. How HD broadcasting works ൅ since it is both analogue and digital. During 1 HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio models only) hybrid operation, receivers still continue to and broadcasts of this type are available in 10 Introduction receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD many areas of the United States. However, radio receivers incorporate both modes of there are a few key differences: reception, where the receiver will automatically Instead of transmitting one analogue sig- switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal • nal, stations send out a bundled signal – cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. both analogue and digital. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the symbol will appear in the audio sys- • An HD radio receiver can receive both dig- ital and analogue broadcasts. Depending tem display. on the terrain and location of the vehicle More information about HD radio and IBOC (which will influence the signal strength), can be found on Ibiquity's website, the receiver will determine which signal to www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. receive.

Benefits of digital broadcasting Limitations • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio and AM as analogue FM). only): The main channel is the only channel broadcast that can receive in hybrid mode (both dig- • Some FM frequencies offer a greater num- ital and analogue). If a frequency has sub- HD radio is a brand name registered by the ber of listening choices through “multicast- Ibiquity digital corporation2. They are the channels, they are broadcast in digital ing” (consisting of a frequency's main mode only. The main FM channel will be developer of a broadcasting technology called channel and any sub-channels that may IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC also be available on that particular fre- (Volvo uses the symbol > to indicate there the method of transmitting a digital radio quency. See also the section "Sub-chan- are sub-channels available) The sub-FM broadcast signal centered on the same fre- nels" below). quency as the AM or FM station's present fre- • When receiving a digital signal there is no quency. multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences.

1 HD Radio(TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. HD Radio(TM) is only available in vehicles not equipped with the optional integrated CD changer. 2 HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. 

247 10 Audio

Radio functions

channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 NOTE 3. Press ENTER to turn HD off (the X will dis- WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. appear from the box on the display screen). 10 There may be a noticeable difference in • Reception coverage area: Due to current sound quality when a change from analogue This will disable the radio's capability to receive IBOC transmitter power limitations, the to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such digital broadcasts but it will continue to func- reception coverage area in digital mode is as: tion as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM somewhat more limited than the station's receiver. Please note that when HD is switched Volume increase or decrease analogue coverage area. Please be aware • off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-chan- that as with any radio broadcast technol- • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ nels (see the following section for a more ogy, terrain, time of day, foliage level and Treble cut or boost detailed explanation of sub-channels). building location can have positive or neg- Time alignment (Digital program mate- • Repeat steps 2 and 3 above to reactivate HD ative effects on radio reception. rial in extreme cases can be as much as (an X will appear in the box on the display • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue 8 seconds behind the analogue). This screen). blending: Analogue to digital blending will will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- The above items are dependant on the Sub-channels set threshold in the receiver. This will be broadcaster's equipment settings and do noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio reception) and is normal. receiver or antenna systems.

Switching HD on or off The factory setting for HD radio is on. However, when driving through areas with weak HD sig- nals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/ digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and is in AM or FM mode. 2. Press MENU in the center console control Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels panel.

248 10 Audio

Radio functions

In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM NOTE Listening to satellite radio wavebands only) will also have sub-channels The Sirius satellite system consists of a number When the radio has gone into HD mode, 10 offering additional types of programming or • of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous it may take several seconds before the music. orbit. ">" symbol (if the current frequency has In such cases, a number will be displayed to any sub-channels) is displayed to the the right of the frequency number indicating right of the frequency. Pressing the NOTE that the currently tuned frequency has at least arrow keys before the number is dis- • The digital signals from the Sirius satel- one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indi- played will cause the radio to tune to the lites are line-of-sight, which means that cates that you are currently listening to the first next available radio station, not to the physical obstructions such as bridges, sub-channel on frequency 93.9. current station's sub-channels. tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere Selecting sub-channels • When you are no longer in broadcasting with signal reception. To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press range of the currently tuned sub-chan- • Avoid any obstructions, such as metal- the right arrow key on the center console or on nel, No HD reception will be dis- lic objects transported on roof racks or the steering wheel keypad. To go back to the played. The radio will then be muted in a ski box, or other antennas that may and it will be necessary to tune to or main channel, press the left arrow key. To go impede signals from the SIRIUS satel- search for a new radio station. to subchannel 2 (if available), press the right lites. arrow key. Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main Selecting Sirius radio mode see page 245 for information on storing sta- channel, pressing the left arrow key will tune to 1. Press Power to switch on the audio system tions. the next lower radio frequency. (see page 245 for information on the stand- If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it ard radio functions). may take up to 6 seconds before the channel 2. Press the MODE button repeatedly until becomes audible. If you press this button while Sirius 1 or 2 is displayed. you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No HD reception will be displayed. Activating Sirius radio 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text "CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE" is dis-



249 10 Audio

Radio functions

played (see also "Selecting a channel" in 5. Use the left or right arrow keys to select a 1. Press MENU and scroll to "Direct channel the right column). channel in the currently chosen category. entry." 10 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). 6. Press ENTER to listen to a channel. 2. Use the numerical keypad to enter the channel's number. 3. When asked for the Sirius ID number press AUTO to display this number. It is also NOTE 3. Press ENTER. The radio will tune to this possible to retrieve the Sirius ID from the • The category "All" is default, which ena- channel, even if it belongs to a category MENU. bles you to scroll through the entire list other than the currently selected one. 4. "Updating subscription" will be dis- of available satellite channels. played while the subscription is being • The channel categories are automati- NOTE updated, after which the display will return cally updated several times a year. This • The numbers of skipped or locked to the normal view. takes approximately two minutes and channels will not be displayed. will interrupt normal broadcasting. A SIRIUS ID message will be displayed while updat- • If a channel is locked, the access code must be entered before the channel can The SIRIUS ID is required when contacting the ing is in progress. Information on chan- nel or feature updates is available at be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your on page 251. account and when making any account trans- www.sirius.com. actions. The SIRIUS ID is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number (ESN). Selecting a channel Scanning There are three ways of tuning in a channel: Selecting a channel category NOTE 1. Select Sirius radio mode as described • Using the left and right arrow keys SCAN automatically searches through the above. By turning the tuning control • list of satellite channels, see page 246 for 2. Press ENTER. • Through direct channel entry more detailed information. 3. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll Direct channel entry through the list of categories. The Sirius satellite channels are numbered Storing a channel A long press on one of the number keys 4. Press ENTER or the right arrow key to consecutively throughout all of the categories. • stores the currently tuned channel on that select a category. To access a channel directly: key. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in Sirius 1 or 2 mode will tune to the

250 10 Audio

Radio functions

preset satellite channel stored on that but- Song seek Advanced settings ton, regardless of the currently selected When a satellite radio channel plays one of the This menu function enables you to make set- 10 channel category. songs stored in the song memory, the listener tings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. will be alerted by a text message and an audi- To access this menu: ble signal. Song Seek and Song Memory 1. Press MENU. The Song Seek and Song Memory functions Press ENTER to listen to the song or 2. Scroll to Sirius menu. provide both audio and visual notification when EXIT to cancel. Sirius is broadcasting your favorite songs. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: 3. Select ADVANCED SIRIUS SETTINGS. Song Seek enables you to store the name of the song for future advance notification when 1. Press MENU WARNING that song is being played. The Song Memory 2. Scroll to "Song seek" feature makes it possible to view all of the cur- Settings should be made when the vehicle rent songs that are stored in memory. 3. Press ENTER to activate or deactivate the is at a standstill. function. Song memory The following settings can be made in the Sir- Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's NOTE ius menu. memory. When the song has ended, the radio will • Songs can be added to the song list 1. Press MENU. remain tuned to the channel on which the • Channel skip settings can be made song was played. 2. Scroll to "Add song to song • Channel lock settings can be made memory" and follow the instructions The channel access code can be displayed Radio text • shown in the display. or changed The text that is displayed about the song that If a new song is selected when the memory is is currently playing can be changed. Use the • Your Sirius ID can be displayed full, you will be prompted to press ENTER to AUTO button or the menu to display Artist, delete the last song on the list. Skip options or , or switch off radio Track title: Composer This function is used to remove a channel from text using Sirius radio text…. NOTE the list of available channels. The remaining songs in the list will move Skip current down one position, and the newly added 1. Select Channel skip list and press song will be placed at the top of the list. ENTER.



251 10 Audio

Radio functions

2. Select a category in the list and press 2. Select Channel lock list and press CHANGE CODE ENTER. ENTER This function makes it possible to change the 10 3. Skip channels in the list presented by 3. Enter the channel access code and press channel access code. The default code pressing ENTER or right arrow key. ENTER. is 0000. To change the code: Unskip all channels 4. Select a category in the list and press This permanently removes all channels from ENTER. 1. Select Change code and press ENTER. the skip list and makes them available for 5. Lock channels in the list presented by 2. Enter the current code and press ENTER. selection. pressing ENTER or right arrow. 3. Enter the code and press ENTER. The channel is now locked and a checked box Temp. unskip all ch. 4. Confirm the new code and press ENTER. This function will temporarily unskip all chan- will be displayed to indicate this. It will be nec- nels and make them available for selection. The essary to enter the channel access code1 in If an incorrect code is entered, the text channels remain on the skip list and will again order to listen to a locked channel. Incorrect code is displayed. be skipped the next time the ignition is Unlocking a channel: If you have forgotten the access code: switched on. A channel's access code1 is required to unlock 1. Select "Sirius ID:" in the Sirius settings a channel. Channel lock menu and press ENTER. Access to specific channels can be restricted Unlock all channels 2. Press and hold the ENTER button for (locked). A locked channel will not provide This permanently removes all channels from 2 seconds. audio, song titles, or artist information. the locked list and makes them available for selection. 3. The current code will be displayed. NOTE Temp. unlock all ch. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with All channels are initially unlocked. This function will temporarily unlock all chan- assistance. nels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the locked list and will SIRIUS ID Locking a channel again be locked the next time the ignition is This function displays the 12-digit Sirius acti- 1. Select "Sirius ID:" in the menu and select switched on. vation ID. LOCK OPTIONSLOCK OPTIONS and press ENTER.

252 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

CD function controls Playing a CD NOTE Single CD player • Ensure that Insert disc is displayed 10 Start the CD player by pressing the MODE but- before inserting a disc. ton (5) and inserting a disc in the slot (4). If there • If a CD position in the changer contain- is already a disc inserted, it will begin to play. ing a disc is selected, and the audio system is in CD mode when it is NOTE switched on, the CD will play automati- cally. If a CD is in the slot when the audio system is in CD mode, the CD will be played auto- matically. CD eject Eject from Single CD player CD changer Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc.

G026367 The CD changer can hold up to six discs. Eject from CD changer 1. Start the CD changer by pressing the This function makes it possible to eject a single MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL–press MODE button (5). disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer. the up or down arrow keys to scroll in a 2. Select an empty position using the 1–6 but- Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the menu, or the keys on the left/right sides of tons or the up/down keys on the MENU disc that is currently playing. the control to change CD tracks/fast for- NAVIGATION CONTROL. The display ward/back A longer press (more than two seconds) shows which positions are empty. Buttons for selecting a disc in the starts the process of ejecting all of the 3. Insert a disc into the slot (4). optional CD changer discs in the changer. CD eject button CD slot MODE button TUNING dial for selecting tracks



253 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

NOTE time that this takes depends on the quality of NOTE the disc. 10 • The EJECT ALL function can only be The TUNING dial (6) (turn clockwise to go to used while the vehicle is at a standstill Navigating the disc and playing tracks the next track/file, or counterclockwise to and will be cancelled if the vehicle If a disc with audio files is in the CD player, go to the previous track/file) or the steering begins to move. press ENTER to display a list of folders on the wheel keypad can also be used for this pur- pose. • For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected disc. CD must be removed within 12 seconds Use the up and down arrows in the navigation Fast forward/back or it will be automatically drawn back control (see the illustration on page 253) to into the slot and the CD player will enter Press and hold down the left or right arrows move among the folders on the disc. Audio files pause mode. Press the CD button to keys in the menu navigation control (or the restart the disc. have the symbol and folders containing corresponding keys on the optional steer- these files have the symbol. Press ing wheel keypad) to search within a track/ ENTER to play a selected folder or a file. CD Pause file or the whole disc. The search continues for as long as the buttons are held down. When the audio system volume is turned off When the music file has been played, the completely, the CD player will pause and will player will continue to play the rest of the files Random play resume playing when the volume is turned up in the current folder. When all of the files in the This function plays the tracks/files on a CD (or again. folder have been played, the player will auto- on all of the CDs if the vehicle is equipped with matically go to the next folder and play the files Audio files the optional CD changer) in random order in it. (shuffle). In addition to playing normal music CDs, the Press the left or right arrow key on the naviga- CD player/changer can also play discs con- Activating/deactivating the random taining files in mp3 or wma format. tion control if the entire name of the current track does not fit in the display. function-CD player If a normal CD is being played: NOTE Changing tracks 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. Certain discs that are copy protected can- Briefly press the left or right arrow keys on the not be read by the player. MENU NAVIGATION CONTROL to skip to the 2. Select Random and press ENTER. previous or next track/file. If a CD with audio files is being played: When a disc with audio files is inserted in the 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. player, the player scans the disc's folders 2. Select Random and press ENTER. before it begins playing the files. The length of

254 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

3. Select Disc or Folder and press ENTER. 1. Press MENU. Select the menu for relevant NOTE sound source and press ENTER. Activating/deactivating the random • The Eject all function can only be used 10 function-CD changer 2. Select Disc text in the menu and press while the vehicle is at a standstill and will ENTER. be cancelled if the vehicle begins to If a normal CD is being played: > If information is stored on the disc, it will move. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. now appear in the display. • For reasons of traffic safety, the ejected 2. Select Random and press ENTER. To deactivate this function, select Disc text in CD must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back 3. Select Single disc or All discs and press the menu and press ENTER. into the slot and the CD player will enter ENTER. Scan pause mode. Press the CD button to If a CD with audio files is being played: This function plays the first 10 seconds of each restart the disc. 1. Press MENU followed by ENTER. track/file on the CD. 2. Select and press . Random ENTER Press SCAN. Compact disc care 3. Select Single disc or Folder and press Press EXIT or SCAN to stop the scan func- Keep the following in mind when playing/han- ENTER. tion and listen to an entire track/file. dling compact discs

CD eject • Do not put tape or labels on the disc itself. NOTE They could become stuck in the player. Single CD player • CDR discs can cause listening problems CD changer only–you can only select the Press the eject button (3) to eject the disc. next random track/file on the current disc. due to the quality of the disc or recording CD changer equipment used. This function makes it possible to eject a single Press the EXIT button to stop random play. • DualDisc: The audio side of a DualDisc disc, or to eject all of the discs in the changer. The random function is automatically deacti- (combined CD/DVD) does not meet CD vated when another disc is selected. • Press the eject button (3) briefly to eject the specifications and may not play in your disc that is currently playing. audio system. Disc text (CD changer only) • A longer press (more than two seconds) • Keep the discs clean. Wipe them with a Certain CDs contain information about the starts the process of ejecting all of the soft, clean, lint-free cloth, working from the disc, such as the titles of the tracks, etc. This discs in the changer. center outward. If necessary, dampen the information can be shown in the display by cloth with a neutral soap solution. Dry thor- activating the DISC TEXT function. oughly before using.



255 10 Audio

CD player/CD changer

• Never use cleaning spray or antistatic liq- uid. Use only cleaners specifically made for 10 CDs. • Use discs of the correct size only (3.5" discs should never be used). • Volvo does not recommend the use of plastic outer rings on the disc. • Condensation may occur on discs/optical components of the changer in cold winter weather. The disc can be dried with a clean, lint-free cloth. Optical components in the CD changer may, however, take up to one hour to dry off. • Never attempt to play a damaged CD. • When not in use, the discs should be stored in their covers. Avoid storing discs in excessive heat, direct sunlight or in dusty locations.

256 10 Audio

Audio menu

FM1/FM2 menu CD changer* menu 1. Radio text When a normal music CD is selected. 10 2. Audio settings… 1. Random… 2. Disc text AM menu 3. Audio settings… 1. Audio settings… CD changer* menu CD menu When a CD containing files in MP3 format is For normal music CDs selected. 1. Random 1. Playlist 2. Disc text 2. Random… 3. Audio settings… 3. Disc text 4. Audio settings… CD menu For CDs containing files in MP3 format AUX menu 1. Playlist 1. AUX input volume… 2. Random… 2. Audio settings… 3. Disc text 4. Audio settings… USB menu 1. Playlist 2. Random… 3. Track information 4. Audio settings…

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

Introduction and other controls on the cell phone can The symbol indicates that the hands-free always be used regardless of whether or not system is active. 10 the phone is connected to the hands-free sys- tem. A long press on the PHONE button deactivates the hands-free system and disconnects the cell phone. NOTE Not all cell phones are fully compatible with Connecting cell phones the hands-free system. A list of compatible The procedure for connecting a cell phone var- phones is available at your Volvo retailer or ies, depending on the phone itself, and on at www.volvocars.us whether or not the phone has been previously connected. WARNING If this is the first time the phone is to be con- nected to the hands-free system, proceed as Never use the hands-free feature or any other device in your vehicle in a way that follows: distracts you from the task of driving safely. Alternative 1–using the vehicle's menus System overview Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Cell phone 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth® func- tion (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if Location of the microphone Getting started necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com Center console control panel and display Use the controls in the center console (3) to 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth® hands- access, navigate and make selections in the free system by briefly pressing the Bluetooth® hands-free hands-free system’s menus (see page 262). PHONE button. This feature makes it possible to set up a wire- Activating/deactivating > Add phone will be displayed. If one or less connection between a Bluetooth -ena- Ÿ A short press on the PHONE button in the cen- more cell phones are already registered bled cell phone and the vehicle’s audio system. ter console activates the hands-free system. in the system, they will also be dis- This enables the audio system to function as a The text PHONE will appear at the top of the played. hands-free connection and allows you to display to indicate that the audio system is in remote-control a number of the phone’s func- 3. Select Add phone. telephone mode. tions. The microphone used by this system is located in the ceiling console (2). The buttons

258 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

> The audio system will search for cell more information on synchronizing a cell When the cell phone is disconnected from the phones that are in range. This search phone, see page 261. hands-free system, a call in progress can be takes approximately 30 seconds. Any continued using the cell phone’s own speaker 10 When a connection has been established, the phones detected will be displayed with and microphone. symbol and the cell phone’s Bluetooth® their Bluetooth® names. The hands-free name will be displayed. The cell phone can system’s Bluetooth® name will appear NOTE now be controlled from the audio system. in the cell phone’s display as My Car. Certain cell phones may require confirma- 4. Select one of the cell phones shown in the Making a call tion from the phone’s keypad when a call is audio system’s (center console) display. 1. Ensure that PHONE is shown at the top of transferred from hands-free to the cell the center console display and that the phone. 5. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the symbol is visible (by pressing briefly on digits shown in the audio system’s display. PHONE on the center console). Alternative 2–using the cell phone’s menus Handling calls 2. Dial the desired phone number or use the 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly phone book (see page 261). Incoming calls pressing the PHONE button in the center Press ENTER to answer a call, even if the console. If there is a cell phone connected, 3. Press ENTER. audio system is currently in e.g., CD or FM disconnect it from the hands-free system. End the call by pressing EXIT. mode. 2. Perform a search using the cell phone’s Disconnecting the cell phone Press EXIT to defer a call. ® Bluetooth function (consult the cell The cell phone is automatically disconnected phone’s owner’s manual if necessary). Automatic answer from the audio system if it is moved out of This function means that incoming calls will be 3. Select My Car in the list of devices shown range. For more information about connec- answered automatically. Activate or deactivate in the cell phone’s display. tions, see page 258. the function in the menu system under Phone 4. When prompted, enter the PIN code 1234 The cell phone can be manually disconnected Menu… Call options… Automatic in the cell phone. from the hands-free system by pressing answer. PHONE. The hands-free system is also deac- 5. Connect to My Car from the cell phone. tivated when the ignition is switched off (or if Call settings The cell phone will be registered and will be the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equip- While a call is in progress, press MENU or connected automatically to the audio system ped with the optional keyless drive). ENTER on the center console to access the while the text Synchronizing is displayed. For following functions:



259 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

• Mute microphone: mute the audio sys- audio system must be switched to one of the If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s tem’s microphone. other modes (FM, CD, etc). ring tone1, go to Phone Menu… Phone 10 • Transfer call to cell: transfer the call from Audio system sound can be automatically settings… Sounds and volume… Ring hands-free to the cell phone. muted when a phone call is received in signals… Use cell phone signal Phone book: this feature enables you to • Phone Menu… Phone settings… search for a stored telephone number. Sounds and volume… Mute radio and More information about registering and connecting cell phones NOTE adjust the volume with the / keys on the center console. A maximum of 5 cell phones can be registered • On certain cell phones, the connection in the hands-free system. Registration only is broken when the mute function is Ringing volume needs to be done once for each phone. After used, which is normal. If this happens, Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings… registration, the cell phones can then be found the hands-free system will prompt you Sounds and volume… Ring volume in the list of registered phones. Only one cell to reconnect. phone can be connected to hands-free at a and adjust the volume with the / keys on • A new call cannot be initiated while time. Phones can be unregistered in Phone the center console. another call is in progress. Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone Ringing tones The hands-free system’s integrated ringing Automatic connection When the hands-free system is active and the Sound settings tones can be selected in Phone Menu… most recently connected cell phone is within Call volume Phone settings… Sounds and volume… range, it is detected automatically. When the Call volume can be adjusted while a call is in Ring signals… Ring signal 1, etc. audio system searches for the most recently progress using the buttons in the steering connected phone, this phone’s name appears wheel keypad. NOTE in the display. To manually connect a different cell phone, press EXIT. Audio system volume The connected cell phone’s ring tone is not When PHONE is displayed, volume for the switched off when one of the hands-free Manual connection audio system can be adjusted in the normal system's ringing tones is used. To connect a phone other than the one that way with the audio system's volume control. In was most recently connected or to switch order to adjust volume during a phone call, the

1 Not supported by all cell phones.

260 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection between cell phones that are already regis- If the phone book contains information about Call options… Voice mail number. If no tered in the hands-free system: someone who is trying to call you, this infor- number has been stored, this menu can be mation will be shown in the display. 10 Put the audio system in telephone mode and accessed by a prolonged press on button 1. Once a phone number has been stored, press follow the instructions in the display or change Searching for contacts and hold 1 to dial this number. the connected cell by going into the menu sys- The easiest way to search for a contact in the tem under Phone Menu… Bluetooth… phone book is to press and hold any of the Call lists Connect phone or Change phone. buttons 2–9 in the center console (no. 3 in the Lists of calls in a particular cell phone are cop- illustration on page 258. This starts a search ied to the hands-free system each time that Phone book based on the first letter on the button that has phone is connected. These lists are then upda- been pressed. In order to use the hands-free system’s phone ted while the phone is connected. Press book (list of contacts), PHONE must be dis- The phone book can also be accessed by ENTER to show the most recently dialed num- played at the top of the center console display pressing the navigation buttons / on the bers. Other call lists can be found under Call register…. and the symbol must be visible. center console or by pressing / on the steering wheel keypad. A search can also be The audio system stores a copy of the phone NOTE book of each registered cell phone. The phone made in the phone book’s search menu in book is automatically copied each time a Phone book… Search: Certain cell phones display the list of the phone is connected. This function can be acti- most recently dialed numbers in reverse 1. Enter the first letter of the contact’s name order. vated in Phone settings… Synchronize and press ENTER or simply press ENTER. phone book. Searches for contacts are only 2. Select the desired contact and press Entering text made in the phone book of the currently con- ENTER to make a call to that person. nected cell phone. Text is entered by using the number buttons in Voice control the center console. Press a button once to NOTE If the cell phone that is currently connected enter the first letter on the button, twice to enter allows calls to be made via voice commands, the second letter, etc. Continue to press the If a particular cell phone does not support this function can be used by pressing and hold- button to display other characters. copying of the phone book, List is empty will be displayed when copying has been ing ENTER. Press EXIT briefly to erase a character. Press completed. and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that Voice mail number have been entered. Use the / buttons on The phone number to your voice mail can be changed in the menu Phone settings… 

261 10 Audio

Bluetooth® hands-free connection

the center console to navigate among the char- 5.1.3. Mute radio acters. 10 5.2. Synchronize phone book Bluetooth® menus 1. Call register… 1.1. Last 10 missed calls 1.2. Last 10 received calls 1.3. Last 10 dialed calls 2. Call register… 2.1. Search 2.2. Copy fr. cell phone 3. Bluetooth… 3.1. Change phone 3.2. Remove phone 3.3. Connect fr. cell phone 3.4. Car Bluetooth info 4. Call options… 4.1. Automatic answer 4.2. Voice mail number 5. Phone settings… 5.1. Sounds and volume… 5.1.1. Ring volume 5.1.2. Ring signals…

262 10 Audio

10

263 264 ov rgas...... 279 Volvo programs...... 278 Three-way catalyticconverter...... 276 Electrical system...... Engine specifications 273 Engine oil...... Fuel, oils,and Dimensions andweights Label information fluids...... 266 ...... 274 ...... 268 ...... 271

G000000 SPECIFICATIONS 11 11 Specifications

Label information

11

266 11 Specifications

Label information

Model plate Vehicle Emission Control Information Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable color and upholstery, etc. emission standards, as evidenced by the cer- tification label on the underside of the hood. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety For further information regarding these regula- Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) tions, please consult your Volvo retailer. and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) 11 standards (Canada) Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certifi- cation label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For fur- ther information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer.

Loads and Tire Pressures The appearance of the decal will vary, depend- ing on the market for which the vehicle is intended. Canadian models have the upper decal. U.S. models have the lower decal.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)1 The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The VIN is also stamped on the right hand door pillar.

1 The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts.

267 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Dimensions

11

Position Dimension A 103.9 in. (264 cm)

B Length 175.9 in. (447 cm)

C Load length, floor, seatback down 68.7 in. (175 cm)

D Load length, floor 38.4 in. (98 cm)

E Load height 17.3 in. (44 cm)

F Height 57.2 in. (145 cm)

G Track, front 60.4 in. (154 cm)

268 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Position Dimension H Track, rear 60.3 in. (153 cm)

I Load width, floor 40.4 in. (103 cm)

J Width 69.7 in. (177 cm) 11 K Width encl. door mirrors 79.6 in. (202 cm)

Weights Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight FWDA: 4320 lbs lbs 1960 kg FWD Turbo: 4320 lbs 1960 kg AWDB Turbo: 4450 lbs 2020 kg

Capacity weight FWD: 800 lbs 365 kg AWD: 800 lbs 365 kg

Permissible axle weight, front FWD: 2380 lbs 1080 kg FWD Turbo: 2380 lbs 1080 kg AWD Turbo: 2420 lbs 1100 kg

Permissible axle weight, rear FWD: 2130 lbs 970 kg FWD Turbo: 2130 lbs 970 kg AWD Turbo: 2220 lbs 1000 kg



269 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Category USA Canada Curb weight FWD: 3165–3300 lbs 1435–1505 kg AWD: 3415–3455 lbs 1555–1575 kg

Max. roof load All models: 165 lbs All models: 75 kg 11 Max. trailer weight (w/o brakes)C All models: 1540 lbs All models: 700 kg

Max. trailer weight (with brakes)C All models: 2000 lbs All models: 900 kg

Max. tongue weight All models: 165 lbs All models: 75 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive C Models equipped with the B5244S7 engine (engine code 39, which is the 6th and 7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN number, see chapter Label information, for the location of the VIN plate), may not be used to tow trailers or vehicles of any kind. This could cause damage to the vehicle's emission control systems.

CAUTION The maximum permissible axle loads and/ or the gross vehicle weight must not be exceeded.

WARNING When adding accessories, equipment, lug- gage and other cargo to your vehicle, the total capacity weight must not be exceeded.

270 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

Specifications and capacities Category Specification Capacity Fuel tank Octane rating: unleaded gasoline, minimum 15.9 US gallons (60 liters) octane requirement AKI 87, recommended rat- Models with All Wheel Drive have a tank volume of ing AKI 91 or above. 15 US gallons (57 liters). 11 Models with engine code 39 have a fuel tank capacity of 14 US gallons (53 liters). This code is the 6th and 7th digits from the left in your vehicle's VIN number. see page 266 for the location of the VIN plate.

Engine oil (with filter replacement) See page 273 for information on engine oil 6.1 US quarts (5.8 liters) specifications.

Automatic transmission oil JWS 3309 8.14 US quarts (7.7 liters)

Manual transmission oil BOT 350 M3 5-speed: 2.2 US quarts (2.1 liters) 6-speed: 2.0 US quarts (1.9 liters) – turbo models

Coolant Volvo original coolant/antifreeze (50/50 mix- 10.5 US quarts (10 liters) – models with automatic ture of water and anti-freeze) transmission 10 US quarts (9.5 liters) – models with manual trans- mission

Brake fluid DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 0.63 US quarts (0.6 liters) 9437433

Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A or equivalent 1.3 US quarts (1.2 liters) – system and reservoir com- bined



271 11 Specifications

Fuel, oils, and fluids

Category Specification Capacity Washer fluid reservoir Use washer fluid solvent in cold weather con- 6.8 US quarts (6.5 liters) ditions.

Air conditioning system Refrigerant – R134a 1.2 lbs. (530 grams) 11 NOTE The transmission oil does not normally need to be changed during the service life of the vehicle. However, it may be necessary to replace the oil if the vehicle is often driven in areas of sustained temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, for prolonged driving in moun- tainous areas, or if the vehicle is often driven short distances in temperatures under 40 °F (5 °C).

272 11 Specifications

Engine oil

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. See American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC the viscosity chart. symbol specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine pro- tection. 11 Volume: 6.1 US qts (5.8 liters). Volume between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick: approximately 1.4 US qts (1.3 lit- ers). Volvo recommends Castrol. G022917 Depending on your driving habits, premium or G023491 synthetic oils may provide superior fuel econ- Viscosity chart omy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service Extreme engine operation three parts: technician for recommendations on premium Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 • The upper section describes the oil's per- or synthetic oils. and complying with oil quality requirements are formance level. recommended for driving in areas of sustained Oil additives must not be used. • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. temperature extremes (hot or cold), when tow- ing a trailer over long distances, and for pro- • The lower section indicates whether the oil NOTE longed driving in mountainous areas. has demonstrated energy-conserving Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is properties in a standard test in comparison changed at the normal service intervals. to a reference oil. This oil is only used at customer request, at additional charge. Please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

273 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Engine designation B5244S4 B5244S7A B5254T7

OutputB kW/rps 125/100 123/100 169/83 hp/rpm 168/6000 165/6000 227/5000 11 TorqueB Nm/rps 230/73 230/73 320/25-80 ft. lbs./rpm 170/4400 170/4400 236/1500-4800

No. of cylinders 5 5 5

Displacement (liters/cubic inches) 2.44/148.6 2.44/148.6 2.52/153.8

Bore (mm/in.) 83/3.27 83/3.27 83/3.27

Stroke (mm/in.) 90/3.54 90/3.54 93.2/3.67

Compression ratio 10.3:1 10.3:1 9.0:1

Spark plugs type Volvo kit no. 30650843 Volvo kit no. 30650843 Volvo kit no. 30650379 gap inches/mm (3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6 ± 0.1mm (3x) 0.024 ± 0.004 in./0.6 ± 0.1mm 0.027in./0.7mm tightening torque ft. lbs./Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm 22.5 ft. lbs./30 Nm

A Certain markets. B The engine specifications for output and torque listed in this table are based on the use of premium fuel.

Charge air cooler (Intercooler) pressed inlet air. The resulting increase in air cooler (which resembles a radiator) is located Turbocharged engines employ a turbo-com- flow raises pressure in the intake manifold and between the turbo-compressor and inlet mani- pressor to force air into the engine inlet mani- increases engine power over that developed by fold. fold and a charge air cooler to cool the com- the normally-aspirated engine. The charge air

274 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Fuel system The engine is equipped with a multiport fuel injection system.

11

275 11 Specifications

Electrical system

General information If the battery must be replaced, replace it with 12-volt system with voltage controlled gener- one with the same cold start capacity and ator. Single wire system in which the chassis reserve capacity as the original (see the decal and engine block are used as conductors, on the battery). grounded on the chassis. WARNING 11 Battery PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Voltage 12 V 12 V Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- sories contain lead and lead compounds, Cold start capacity 600 AA 700 AB chemicals known to the state of California (CCA) to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Reserve capacity 120 min 135 min (RC)

Capacity (Ah) 70 80

A Models equipped with the High Performance audio system. B Models equipped with the Premium Sound audio system, the Volvo Navigation System and/or keyless drive.

Bulbs used in the car Bulb Output Type Low beam headlights (models with halogen headlights) 55W H7

High beam headlights (models with halogen headlights) 55W H9

High beam headlights (models with Active Bending Lights* only) 55W H7

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11 Specifications

Electrical system

Bulb Output Type Brake lights, back-up lights, rear fog light 21W P21W

Front turn signals (models with halogen only), rear turn signals 21W PY21W

Front turn signals (models with Active Bending Lights*) 24W PY24W 11 Rear parking lights, side marker lights (upper socket) 5W P21/W5

Rear parking lights (lower socket) 5W R5W

Footwell lighting, trunk light, license plate lighting 5W C5W

Vanity mirror 1.2W Festoon

Front parking lights and side marker lights 5W W5W

Front fog lights* 35W H8

Glove compartment light 3W Festoon

NOTE For information regarding any other bulbs not mentioned in this section, please con- tact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277 11 Specifications

Three-way catalytic converter

Three-way catalytic converter – components or location, or removing com- general information ponents, and/the repeated use of leaded • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain fuel. engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition NOTE systems, may cause unusually high three- Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with 11 way catalytic converter temperatures. Do three-way catalytic converters. not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating condi- tions, such as engine overheating or back- firing. A properly tuned engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather condi- tions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way cata- lytic converter or exhaust system over- heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Electronic Control Module, or the vehicle may be ille- gal and can cause three-way catalytic con- verter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system

278 11 Specifications

Volvo programs

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional informa- tion, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. 11 If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475

Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo sup- ports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certi- fied technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These pro- fessional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition.

279 12 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Audio system Automatic transmission - Geartronic...... 150 audio functions...... 240 AUX port...... 240 12-volt sockets...... 63 automatic sound control...... 244 Axle weight...... 186, 269 AUX port...... 240 CD changer...... 253 A CD player/changer...... 253 compact disc care...... 255 B A/C (air conditioning)...... 92 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 243 Backrest, rear seat, folding...... 113 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 154 equalizer...... 243 HD digital radio...... 247 Bass...... 242 12 Adaptive brake lights...... 153 menu settings...... 257 Battery Airbags radio functions...... 245 maintenance...... 222 front...... 24 selecting a sound source...... 240 remote key, replacing...... 120 inflatable curtain...... 32 Sirius satellite radio...... 249 specifications...... 276 side impact...... 31 sound settings...... 242 warning symbols...... 222 steering wheel keypad...... 241 Airbag system...... 24 Battery – replacing...... 223 storing radio stations...... 245 Air conditioning...... 92 subwoofer...... 243 Black box...... 13 Air distribution table...... 101 USB/iPodŸ connector...... 241 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 166 Air vents...... 94 Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 78 Bluetooth cell phone connection...... 258 Alarm system...... 130 Autolock...... 83 Booster cushion turning off sensors...... 131 Automatic locking retractor...... 38 accessory...... 45 All Wheel Drive...... 152 Automatic sound control...... 244 Brake fluid...... 220, 271 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 154 Automatic transmission...... 149 Brake lights...... 65, 153 Approach lighting...... 84 kickdown...... 150 Brake system Audio files...... 254 oil...... 271 anti-lock brakes (ABS)...... 154 shiftlock override...... 151 emergency brake assistance...... 154

280 12 Index

fluid...... 220 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 46 Coolant...... 271 general information...... 153 top tether anchors...... 48 changing...... 219 Bulbs Child safety...... 37 checking level of...... 219 headlights...... 224 booster cushions...... 45 Courtesy lighting...... 108 list of...... 276 child restraint systems...... 39 Crash mode...... 36 convertible seats...... 43 Bulbs, replacing...... 224 Cruise control...... 71 infant seats...... 41 Cup holders...... 110, 112 Child safety locks...... 129 Curb weight...... 186, 269 C Climate system 12 air distribution...... 101 Capacities, fluids...... 271 air vents...... 94 Capacity weight...... 186, 269 Electronic Climate Control...... 98 D manual climate control...... 95 Catalytic converter, three-way...... 278 Detachable key blade...... 120 passenger compartment filter...... 92 CD changer...... 253 refrigerant...... 92, 271 Detachable trailer hitch...... 164 CD player...... 253 Climate system, general information...... 92 Dimensions...... 268 Cell phone, hands-free connection...... 258 Clock Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- Central locking system - remote key...... 118 setting...... 83 bag...... 28 Chains...... 189 Cold weather precautions...... 137 Display...... 61 Changing a wheel...... 192 Compact disc care...... 255 Dolby Pro Logic II (DPL II)...... 243 Child restraints Compass in rearview mirror...... 78 Door mirrors...... 79 recalls and registration...... 49 Conserving electrical current...... 138 Driving economically...... 136 Child restraint systems...... 39 Convertible seats...... 43 Driving through water...... 137 booster cushions...... 45 DSTC, stability system...... 157 convertible seats...... 43 infant seats...... 41

281 12 Index

E specifications...... 273 manually operated...... 104 volumes...... 271 power...... 104 Economical driving...... 136 Environment...... 14 Fuel filler door Electrical current – conserving...... 138 Equalizer, audio system...... 243 unlocking...... 66 Electrically operated moonroof...... 81 Eyelets for anchoring loads...... 115 Fuel gauge...... 54 Electrical system...... 276 Fuel requirements...... 140 Electronic Brake Force Distribution Fuel tank volume...... 271 (EBD)...... 154 F Fuses, replacing...... 231 12 Electronic Climate Control...... 93 Federal Clean Air Act...... 212 air distribution table...... 101 Flat tires Electronic Climate Control (ECC)...... 98 G changing...... 192 Emergency brake...... 156 repairing with tire sealing system...... 194 Gasoline requirements...... 140 Emergency locking retractor...... 38 Fluids and oils...... 271 Geartronic...... 150 Emergency starting...... 161 FM1/FM2 menu...... 245 Glossary of tire terminology...... 185 Emergency towing...... 159 Fog lights Glove compartment...... 111 Emission inspection readiness...... 213 front...... 65 locking...... 128 rear...... 65 Engine Gross vehicle weight (GVW)...... 186, 269 specifications...... 274 Front airbags...... 24 starting...... 144 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 28 starting with keyless drive...... 146 Front fog lights...... 65 H Engine compartment overview...... 216 Front park assist...... 170 Hand brake (parking brake)...... 156 Engine oil...... 217 Front seats...... 104 changing...... 217 adjusting the head restraints...... 106 Hazard warning flashers...... 75 checking...... 217 HD digital radio...... 247

282 12 Index

Headlights...... 64 Inflation pressure, checking...... 180 K Active Bending Lights...... 64 Inflation pressure table changing bulbs...... 224 Canadian models...... 182 Key (ignition switch) positions...... 143 high and low beams...... 67 US models...... 181 Key blade...... 120, 124 high beam flash...... 67 Information display...... 54, 61 Keyless drive Headlight washers...... 73 messages in...... 61 location of antennas (pacemaker warn- Head restraints, rear seat...... 113 Information symbol...... 56 ing)...... 125 locking and unlocking the vehicle...... 123 High beam flash...... 67 Inspection, preparing for...... 213 power seat memory...... 124 High beams...... 67 Inspection readiness...... 213 starting the engine...... 146 12 Hoisting the vehicle...... 213 Instrument overview...... 52 Keylock...... 144 Home safe lighting...... 67, 84 Instrument panel...... 52, 54 Kickdown...... 150 Hood, opening...... 215 Instrument panel lighting...... 65 Interior lighting...... 108 L I iPodŸ connector (audio system)...... 241 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 46 Label information...... 266 Ignition switch...... 143 LATCH (ISOFIX) anchors...... 46 Immobilizer...... 144 Lighting panel...... 64 Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...... 118 J Load anchoring eyelets...... 115 Important information...... 10 Jump starting...... 161 Loading the vehicle Indicator and warning symbols...... 54, 56 roof loads...... 165 Infant seats...... 41 Locking Inflatable Curtain...... 32 from the inside...... 127 Inflation pressure...... 179 glove compartment...... 128 Locking the vehicle...... 123

283 12 Index

Locks, child safety...... 129 Oil...... 217 Power windows...... 76 Long distance trips...... 138 changing...... 217 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 21 checking...... 217 Lug nuts (wheel nuts)...... 191 Private locking...... 122 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 279 Opening the hood...... 215 M Opening the trunk from the inside...... 127 R Owner maintenance...... 213 Maintenance...... 212 Radio hoisting the vehicle...... 213 Sirius satellite radio...... 249 12 performed by the owner...... 213 P Radio functions...... 245 Manual climate control...... 95 HD digital radio...... 247 Manual transmission...... 147, 148 Panel lighting, instrument...... 65 Rain sensor - windshield wipers...... 74 Mirrors...... 78 Park assist...... 170 Rear fog light...... 65 Model plate...... 267 Parking brake...... 156 Rear park assist...... 170 Moonroof...... 81 Parking lights...... 64 Rear seat backrests, folding down...... 113 Motor oil...... 217, 273 Passenger’s side front airbag, disabling. . . 28 Rear seats checking...... 217 Periodic owner-performed maintenance. 213 center head restraint...... 113 Permissible axle weight...... 186 Rearview mirror...... 78 auto-dim function...... 78 Personal settings...... 83 O Rearview mirror with compass...... 78 Power door mirrors...... 79 Recalls, child restraints...... 49 Occupant safety...... 18 Power front seat...... 104 Occupant weight sensor...... 28 memory function...... 105 Refrigerant (A/C system)...... 92, 271 Octane recommendations...... 140 Power moonroof...... 81 Refueling...... 142 fuel tank volume...... 271 Power steering fluid...... 220 Registering child restraints...... 49

284 12 Index

Remote key...... 118 unbuckling...... 20 Storage compartments...... 110 battery replacement...... 120 use during pregnancy...... 21 Studded tires...... 189 functions...... 119 Seats, front...... 104 Subwoofer...... 243 key blade...... 120 Shiftlock Sunroof (moonroof)...... 81 Replacing fuses...... 231 override...... 151 Supplemental restraint system...... 23 Reporting safety defects Side door mirrors...... 79 Canada...... 19 Side impact airbags...... 31 USA...... 18 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 31 T Roof loads...... 165 Sirius satellite radio...... 249 12 Tachometer...... 54 Snow chains...... 189 Temporary spare tire...... 190 S Snow tires...... 189 Three-way catalytic converter...... 278 Sound control, automatic...... 244 Safety, occupant...... 18 Tire inflation...... 179 Sound settings, audio system...... 242 Safety defects, reporting Tire inflation pressure Canada...... 19 Spare tire...... 190 Canadian models...... 182 USA...... 18 Stability system...... 157 US models...... 181 Safety locks, child...... 129 Dynamic Stability Traction Control Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 199 (DSTC)...... 157 Seat belt Tires...... 176 reminder...... 21 Starting the engine...... 144 age...... 176 with keyless drive...... 146 Seat belts...... 20 changing...... 192 Automatic locking retractor/Emergency Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 118, 144 changing from summer to winter...... 177 locking retractor...... 38 STC, stability system...... 157 designations...... 183 glossary of terms...... 185 buckling...... 20 Steering wheel improving economy...... 176 maintenance...... 22 adjusting...... 75 inflation...... 179 pretensioners...... 20 keypad...... 241 inflation pressure, checking...... 180

285 12 Index

inflation pressure table, Canadian mod- Transmission Vehicle maintenance...... 212 els...... 182 Geartronic...... 150 performed by the owner...... 213 inflation pressure table, US models.... 181 manual...... 147, 148 Vehicle towing...... 159 load ratings...... 180 shiftlock override...... 151 Vehicle weights...... 269 rotation...... 177 Tread wear indicator...... 178 snow...... 189 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)...... 267 Treble...... 242 spare...... 190 Volvo and the environment...... 14 Trip computer...... 69 speed ratings...... 180 Volvo Inflatable Curtain...... 32 storing...... 177 Trips, long distance...... 138 Volvo maintenance...... 212 12 studded...... 189 Trunk Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 279 tire pressure monitoring system...... 199 opening from the inside...... 127 tire sealing system...... 194 Turn signals...... 67 tread wear indicator...... 178 indicator lights...... 54 uniform tire quality grading...... 188 W winter driving...... 189 Tire sealing system...... 194 U Warning flashers, hazard...... 75 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Warning symbol...... 56 tems)...... 48 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 188 Warranties...... 212 Towing a trailer...... 162 Washer fluid...... 219, 271 trailer hitch...... 164 Washer fluid reservoir...... 216, 219 Towing the vehicle...... 159 V Water, driving through...... 137 Trailer hitch - detachable...... 164 Valet locking...... 122 Weights...... 269 Trailer towing...... 162 Vehicle dimensions...... 268 Wheel nuts...... 191 Vehicle Event Data...... 13 Wheels...... 176 changing...... 192 Vehicle loading...... 186 storing...... 177 roof loads...... 165

286 12 Index

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 34 Windows power...... 76 Windshield washer fluid reservoir...... 216 Windshield wiper blades...... 221 Windshield wipers...... 73 rains sensor...... 74 Winter tires...... 189 Wiper blades 12 replacing windshield wipers...... 221

287 12 Index

12

288

      *     #©$% &